Banner DF-G1-PR-Q7 Operating instructions

350
Cable Survey System
System Manual
Covers DeepView Software Version 5.x.x
and Firmware Version 3.7
TSS (International) Ltd
1, Garnett Close
Greycaine Industrial Estate
Watford, Herts, WD24 7GL
Telephone +44 (0)1923 470800
Facsimile +44 (0)1923 470842
24 hr Customer Support +44 (0)7899 665603
e-mail: tssmail@tss-int.com
The information in this Manual is subject to
change without notice and does not represent
a commitment on the part of TSS (International) Ltd
Document P/N 402197
Issue 2.4
January 2008
abcdef
1 9 9 3
THE QUEEN'S AWARD FOR
EXPORT ACHIEVEMENT
Contents
CAUTIONARY NOTICE
This System Manual contains full installation and operating instructions and is an
important part of the 350 System. This Manual should remain easily available for use
by those who will install, operate and maintain the System.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
Where appropriate, this Manual includes important safety information. Safety information appears as WARNING and CAUTION instructions.
You must obey these instructions:
❐
WARNING instructions alert you to a potential risk of death or injury to users of the
350 System.
❐
CAUTION instructions alert you to the potential risk of damage to the 350 System.
For your convenience, the Table of Contents section includes copies of all the
WARNING and CAUTION instructions contained in this Manual.
Technical Support and contact information
TSS (International) Ltd
1 Garnett Close,
Greycaine Industrial Estate,
Watford,
Herts,
WD24 7GL
Tel:
Fax:
Out of UK Hours Technical Helpline:
These hours are:
DPN 402197
+44 (0)1923 470800
+44 (0)1923 470842
+44 (0)7899 665603
4:30pm - 7:45am Monday to Friday
and 12:30pm Friday to 7:45am Monday
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 6
350 Cable Survey System
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 System Description - - 1.2 Principle of Operation - 1.3 Quick Start for SDC Users
1.4 Warranty - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 1-5
- 1-6
- 1-7
- 1-7
2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.1 Scope of Delivery - - - - - - - - - - 2.2 Unpacking and Inspection - - - - - - 2.3 Surface Components - - - - - - - - 2.4 Sub-sea Components - - - - - - - - 2.4.1 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - 2.4.2 Sensing Coils - - - - - - - - - 2.4.2.1 Sensing Coil Components- 2.4.3 Altimeter - - - - - - - - - - - - 2.4.3.1 Alternative Altimeter Types. 2.4.4 Remotely Operated Vehicles - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 2-2
- 2-4
- 2-5
- 2-9
- 2-9
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
3 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
3.1 SDC Installation - - - - - - - 3.2 Sub-sea Installation - - - - - 3.2.1 SEP - - - - - - - - - - 3.2.2 Sensing Coils - - - - - 3.2.2.1 Assembling the Coils
3.2.2.2 Mounting the Coils 3.2.3 Altimeter Installation - - 3.3 Installation Check List - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 3-2
- 3-3
- 3-3
- 3-5
- 3-6
- 3-9
3-11
3-13
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
4.1 Sub-sea Components - - - - - - - - - - - - 4.1.1 Ground Connections - - - - - - - - - - 4.1.2 Care of Sub-sea Connectors - - - - - - 4.1.3 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - - - - 4.1.3.1 Power Requirement- - - - - - - - 4.1.4 Sensing Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4.1.5 Sub-sea Altimeter - - - - - - - - - - - 4.1.5.1 Direct connection to the SEP - - - 4.1.5.2 Connection to the SDC - - - - - - 4.1.6 Roll/Pitch Sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - 4.2 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - 4.2.1 Power Connection - - - - - - - - - - - 4.2.2 Communication Link SEP to SDC - - - - 4.2.2.1 Alternative Communication Methods
4.2.3 Interface to Data Logger - - - - - - - - 4.2.4 Interface to Video - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 4-2
- 4-3
- 4-4
- 4-4
- 4-5
- 4-7
- 4-8
- 4-9
- 4-9
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-11
4-14
4-16
4-17
-
-
-
-
-
-
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 Software Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.2 Power-on Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 6
Contents
5.3 DeepView For Windows - System Configuration
5.3.1 SEP type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.3.2 Communication ports - - - - - - - - - - 5.4 Print Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 5-5
- 5-5
- 5-6
- 5-8
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 6-2
- 6-2
- 6-2
- 6-2
- 6-2
- 6-2
- 6-2
- 6-7
- 6-8
6-12
6-14
6-18
6-18
6-20
6-22
6-23
6-23
6-25
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-31
7 OPERATING PROCEDURE
7.1 Before the Survey - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.1.1 Personnel and Equipment Availability - - 7.1.2 Tone Frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.1.3 Survey Requirements - - - - - - - - - 7.1.4 Installation Requirements - - - - - - - - 7.2 During the survey - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.2.1 Safety and Pre-dive checks - - - - - - - 7.2.2 Data Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.2.3 Replay Logged Data - - - - - - - - - - 7.3 Data Formats - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.3.1 External Logging Format - - - - - - - - 7.3.1.1 Co-ordinates and Signals Format - 7.3.1.2 Forward Search mode - - - - - - 7.3.2 Internal Logging Format - - - - - - - - 7.3.3 Altimeter Data Format - - - - - - - - - 7.3.3.1 Datasonics PSA 900 and PSA 9000 7.3.3.2 Ulvertech Bathymetric System - - 7.3.3.3 Simrad UK90 - - - - - - - - - - - 7.3.3.4 OSEL Bathymetric System - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 7-2
- 7-2
- 7-3
- 7-3
- 7-3
- 7-4
- 7-6
- 7-6
- 7-7
- 7-8
- 7-8
- 7-8
7-10
7-12
7-14
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-16
6 OPERATION SOFTWARE
6.1 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.1.1 Survey Parameters - - - - - - - - - 6.1.1.1 Tone Frequency - - - - - - - 6.1.1.2 Threshold- - - - - - - - - - - 6.1.1.3 Coil Separation - - - - - - - - 6.2 DeepView for Windows Operating Controls 6.2.1 How to Use DeepView for Windows 6.2.1.1 DeepView File Menu Options - 6.2.1.2 Run/ Display screen - - - - - 6.2.1.3 Forward Search Screen - - - - 6.2.1.4 Other Windows - - - - - - - - 6.2.1.5 Configuration Options - - - - - 6.2.2 Survey Parameters - - - - - - - - - 6.2.2.1 Altimeter - - - - - - - - - - - 6.2.2.2 External Data Logging - - - - 6.2.2.3 Load Factory Defaults- - - - - 6.2.2.4 Video Overlay Setup - - - - - 6.2.3 DeepView for Windows Icon Tools - 6.2.4 DeepView for Windows Function Keys
6.3 After the Dive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4 Replaying a Log File - - - - - - - - - - - 6.5 Quality Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DPN 402197
-
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 6
350 Cable Survey System
7.3.3.5 Tritech SeaKing Bathy 704
7.4 After the Survey - - - - - - - - - - 7.5 Operational Considerations - - - - 7.5.1 Operating Performance - - - - 7.5.2 Sources of Error - - - - - - - 7.5.2.1 ROV Handling - - - - - 7.5.2.2 Electrical Interference - - 7.6 ROVs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.6.1 Speed of Operation - - - - - 7.6.2 Altitude above the Seabed - - 7.6.3 Tracked ROV - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7-17
7-19
7-20
7-20
7-21
7-21
7-26
7-29
7-29
7-29
7-29
8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.1.1 Surface Display Computer - - - 8.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - 8.1.3 Search Coil Array - - - - - - - 8.2 Performance - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3 System Trials - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3.1 Trials Configuration and Procedure
8.3.2 Results - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3.2.1 Accuracy - - - - - - - - - 8.4 Update Rate - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 8-2
- 8-2
- 8-4
- 8-4
- 8-5
- 8-6
- 8-6
- 8-8
- 8-8
- 8-9
9 MAINTENANCE
9.1 Circuit Description - - - - - - - - - - - 9.1.1 Sensing Coils - - - - - - - - - - 9.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - 9.1.2.1 Analogue-to-Digital Converter 9.1.2.2 Processor Board - - - - - - 9.1.2.3 Power Supply- - - - - - - - 9.1.3 Current Loop - - - - - - - - - - - 9.2 Disassembly and Reassembly - - - - - 9.2.1 Surface Display Computer - - - - 9.2.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - - - - - 9.2.3 Coil Cable Continuity - - - - - - - 9.3 Fault Identification - - - - - - - - - - - 9.3.1 Fault on a Single Channel - - - - 9.3.2 Communications Failure - - - - - 9.3.3 Poor Tracking Performance - - - 9.3.4 Altimeter Failure - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 9-2
- 9-3
- 9-4
- 9-4
- 9-5
- 9-7
- 9-7
- 9-9
- 9-9
- 9-9
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-18
9-21
9-22
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
10 SYSTEM DRAWINGS
A OPERATING THEORY
A.1 Electromagnetic Fields A.2 Field Detection - - - A.3 Signal Isolation - - - A.4 Calculation - - - - - -
DPN 402197
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 6
Contents
A.4.1 Survey Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-5
A.4.2 Forward Search Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-7
A.4.3 Skew Measurement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-8
B OPTIONS
B.1 Dualtrack System - - - - - - - - - - - - - B.1.1 The Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - B.1.2 The Differences - - - - - - - - - - - B.1.3 Scope of Delivery - - - - - - - - - - B.1.4 Physical Installation - - - - - - - - - B.1.4.1 Search-coils - - - - - - - - - - B.1.4.2 Sub-sea Pods - - - - - - - - - B.1.5 Electrical Connection - - - - - - - - - B.1.5.1 System Configuration - - - - - - B.1.5.2 System Operation - - - - - - - B.1.6 Power Supply Requirement - - - - - B.2 Training - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B.2.1 Part 1: Foundation Course - - - - - - B.2.2 Part 2: Operators and Engineers Course
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
B-2
- B-2
- B-3
- B-4
- B-6
-B-6
-B-6
- B-7
-B-9
B-10
B-10
B-11
B-11
B-12
C CABLES AND TONES
C.1 Tone Injection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C.1.1 Frequency Selection - - - - - - - - - C.1.2 Connection to the cable - - - - - - - C.1.2.1 Short cables - - - - - - - - - - C.1.2.2 Long cables - - - - - - - - - - C.1.2.3 Fibre-optic Cables - - - - - - - C.1.2.4 General Connection Requirements
C.1.3 Seawater Return Path - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
C-2
-C-2
-C-2
C-2
C-3
C-3
C-4
-C-4
D ALTIMETER
D.1 Overview - - - - - - - - - D.2 Installation - - - - - - - - D.2.1 Electrical Connection D.2.2 Serial Output - - - - D.2.3 Mounting - - - - - - D.2.4 Maintenance - - - - - D.2.5 Test in Air - - - - - - D.2.6 Internal Settings - - - D.3 Theory of Operation - - - - D.3.1 Operating Principles - D.3.1.1 Speed of Sound D.3.1.2 Terminology - - D.3.1.3 Propagation LossD.3.1.4 Limitations - - - D.3.2 Technical Description D.3.2.1 Power Supply - D.3.2.2 Transmitter - - - D.3.2.3 Receiver - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D-1
D-2
-D-2
-D-2
-D-3
-D-4
-D-4
-D-4
D-5
-D-5
D-6
D-6
D-7
D-7
-D-8
D-8
D-9
D-9
DPN 402197
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 6
350 Cable Survey System
D.3.2.4 Sensor Circuitry - D.3.2.5 Digital Circuitry - - D.3.2.6 Averaging Algorithm
D.3.2.7 Optional Modem - D.4 Part Numbers - - - - - - - - D.5 Drawings - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- D-10
- D-10
- D-11
- D-11
- D-11
- D-12
E COIL TESTER
E.1 Pre-Operation - - - - - - - - E.1.1 Coil Calibration Constants
E.2 Operation - - - - - - - - - - E.2.1 Frequency Selection - - E.3 Fault Identification - - - - - - E.4 Battery Replacement - - - - E.5 Maintenance - - - - - - - - E.6 Specification - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
E-3
- E-3
E-5
- E-7
E-8
E-8
E-9
E-9
F REFERENCE
F.1 Survey Details - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -F-3
F.2 System Configuration Details - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -F-3
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 6
Figures
Figure 2–1 Components of the 350 Cable Survey System - - - - - - - Figure 2–2 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 2–3 SDC Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 2–4 SDC PC Console - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 2–5 Components of a coil triad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 3–1 SEP mounting arrangement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 3–2 The coil array reference line - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 3–3 Construction of the starboard coil triad - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 3–4 Coil mounting components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 3–5 Effects of altimeter horizontal offset - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 4–1 System interconnection diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 4–2 SDC Rear panel with key to ports - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 4–3 Link detail shown using the same orientation as in Figure 4–4
Figure 4–4 Link location on the SEP processor board - - - - - - - - - Figure 5–1 DeepView for Windows - System Configuration Wizard - - - Figure 5–2 DeepView for Windows - Summary - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 5–3 DeepView for Windows- Print Configuration - - - - - - - - Figure 6–1 An example of a File Option menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–2 An example of the Print Configuration via Windows Notepad Figure 6–3 DeepView - Run Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–4 DeepView - Forward Search Window - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–5 Scope Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–6 Spectrum Analyser Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–7 System Errors window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–8 Terminal window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–9 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–10 Threshold does not apply to vertical coils. - - - - - - - - Figure 6–11 Altimeter Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–12 Altimeter Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–13 External Output Configuration and Serial Port menu - - - Figure 6–14 Video Overlay Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–15 Video Overlay Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–16 Video Overlay Enable/Disable button - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–17 DeepView function keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–18 Replay a log file screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6–19 Replay toolbar keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 7–1 Using the forward search mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 7–2 ROV positioning errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 7–3 ROV roll errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 7–4 Sloping target - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 7–5 Curved target - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 8–1 Vertical range measurement accuracy - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 8–2 Trials site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–1 Simplified interconnection diagram – Sub-sea installation - Figure 9–2 Simplified schematic of the current-loop - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–3 Processor Board layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–4 ADC Board layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–5 Power Supply Board layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–6 Orientation of the coil connector end-cap - - - - - - - - - -
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
-
-
- 2-2
- 2-5
- 2-6
- 2-6
2-12
- 3-4
- 3-5
- 3-7
- 3-9
3-12
- 4-2
4-11
4-15
4-15
- 5-5
- 5-7
- 5-8
- 6-7
- 6-8
- 6-9
6-12
6-14
6-14
6-15
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-24
6-25
6-28
6-29
6-30
- 7-5
7-21
7-23
7-25
7-28
- 8-5
- 8-7
- 9-2
- 9-8
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
Page vii of x
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 9–7 Single channel failure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–8 Communications failure – CHART 1 - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–9 Communications failure – CHART 2 - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–10 Communications failure – CHART 3 - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–11 Poor tracking performance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–12 Altimeter failure – CHART 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9–13 Altimeter failure – CHART 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 10–1 490234 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - Overall diagram - - Figure 10–2 401105 Coil Pre-amp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 10–3 401104-1 Analogue to Digital Conversion - - - - - - - Figure 10–4 401104-2 Analogue to Digital Conversion - ADC1 - - - Figure 10–5 401104-3 Analogue to Digital conversion – ADC 2 - - Figure 10–6 401104-4 Analogue to Digital conversion – ADC 3 - - Figure 10–7 401103-1 Processor Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 10–8 401103-2 CPU Core - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 10–9 401103-3 Processor Board - Comms - - - - - - - - - Figure 10–10 401103-4 Processor Board - ADC Interface - - - - - Figure 10–11 490221 350CE Cable Survey System Assembly (110V)
Figure 10–12 B930476 350CE 3-axis coil cable assembly - - - - - Figure 10–13 B930473 ROV Tail Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A–1 Lines of magnetic flux - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A–2 Simplified signal path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A–3 Frequency ‘windows’ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A–4 The effect of incident angle on coil response - - - - - - Figure A–5 Coil response as incident angle varies - - - - - - - - - Figure A–6 Determination of relative angle using two coil voltages - Figure A–7 Target location using two coil pairs - - - - - - - - - - Figure A–8 Forward Range Calculation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A–9 Vehicle following target with skew angle - - - - - - - - Figure A–10 Skew angle measurement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure B–1 Surface Display Computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure B–2 Sub-sea components of the TSS 350 System - - - - - Figure B–3 Sub-sea components of the TSS 440 System - - - - - Figure B–4 Electrical interconnection of sub-sea components - - - Figure C–1 Tone injection – Short cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure C–2 Tone injection – Long cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–1 Mounting arrangement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–2 Switch S1 layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–3 Reassembly of the unit. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–4 Speed of Sound meter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–5 Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–6 Internal wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–7 Temperature sensor wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–8 ALT-250 / TSS underwater splice p/n 601824A - - - - Figure D–9 ALT-250 free cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–10 PCB layout - top - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–11 PCB - top - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–12 PCB layout - bottom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure D–13 PCB bottom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
-
-
-
- 9-17
- 9-18
- 9-19
- 9-20
- 9-21
- 9-23
- 9-24
- 10-2
- 10-3
- 10-4
- 10-5
- 10-6
- 10-7
- 10-8
- 10-9
- 10-10
- 10-11
- 10-12
- 10-13
- 10-14
- - A-2
- - A-3
- - A-4
- - A-5
- - A-5
- - A-6
- - A-7
- - A-7
- - A-8
- - A-9
- - B-4
- - B-4
- - B-5
- - B-7
- - C-3
- - C-3
- - D-3
- - D-5
- - D-5
- - D-6
- D-12
- D-13
- D-13
- D-14
- D-15
- D-16
- D-16
- D-17
- D-17
Page viii of x
Figures
Figure E–1 350 System Parameters Configuration screen - - - - - - - - - - - E-4
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page ix of x
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page x of x
Tables
Table 2–1 Components of the 350 Cable Survey System - - - - - - - - - - - 2- 3
Table 4–1 Power and Communications cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 7
Table 4–2 RS232 connection to COM2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 10
Table 4–3 Ideal twisted pair characteristics for successful communication - - 4- 12
Table 4–4 Power and Communications cable – 2-wire current loop connections4- 13
Table 4–5 Power and Communications cable – 4-wire current-loop connections4- 13
Table 4–6 Power and Communications cable – RS232 connections - - - - - 4- 13
Table 4–7 Link settings for LK1 to LK5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 15
Table 4–8 RS232 connection for a data logger - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4- 17
Table 6–1 DeepView Menu Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 3
Table 6–2 Internal Data Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 7
Table 6–3 System errors format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 16
Table 6–4 Terminal Window toolbar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 17
Table 6–5 Factory System Defaults - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 23
Table 6–6 DeepView Toolbar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 25
Table 6–7 Run Window Toolbar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 27
Table 6–8 Replay toolbar function keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6- 30
Table 7–1 External Output format - Survey Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 8
Table 7–2 QC check code meaning – Survey mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 10
Table 7–3 External logging format – Forward search mode - - - - - - - - - - 7- 10
Table 7–4 QC check code meaning – Forward search mode - - - - - - - - - 7- 11
Table 7–5 Internal logging format – Survey co-ordinates - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 12
Table 7–6 Internal logging format – Forward search mode - - - - - - - - - - 7- 13
Table 7–7 Internal logging format – Signals packet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 14
Table 7–8 Altimeter output format – TSS and Datasonics- - - - - - - - - - - 7- 15
Table 7–9 Altimeter output format – Datasonics with pressure transducer- - - 7- 15
Table 7–10 Altimeter output format – Ulvertech Bathymetric system - - - - - 7- 16
Table 7–11 Altimeter output format – Simrad UK90 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 16
Table 7–12 Altimeter output format – OSEL bathymetric system - - - - - - - 7- 17
Table 7–13 Tritech SeaKing Bathy format - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7- 18
Table 8–1 Vertical measurement errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8- 8
Table 8–2 Lateral measurement errors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8- 9
Table 9–1 Connections to the coil cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9- 15
Table B–1 Components of the Dualtrack System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B- 5
Table C–1 Effects of tone frequency choice - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C- 2
Table D–1 Altimeter Specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D- 1
Table D–2 Power/ data connector pinout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D- 2
Table D–3 Switch S1 settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D- 4
Table D–4 Testpoints - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D- 8
Table D–5 Part numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D- 11
Table E–1 350 System Subsea Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E- 5
Table E–2 350 System Connector Cable Identification - - - - - - - - - - - - E- 6
Table E–3 350 System Operating Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E- 7
Table E–4 Coil Tester Frequency settings and expected coil voltages - - - - E- 7
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page xi of xiv
350 Cable Survey System
GLOSSARY
Item
Definition as used throughout this Manual
ROV
Remotely operated vehicle. Any form of sub-sea or surface vehicle supporting the 350 System during survey operations.
SDC
Surface display computer. The configuration, control and display computer supplied by
TSS to operate the 350 System.
SEP
Sub-sea electronics pod. The single electronics housing for the sub-sea installation.
COV
Target depth of cover. The SDC computes this as VRT-ALT
ALT
Coil altitude above the seabed. This could be measured by a sub-sea altimeter connected
either directly to the SEP or through an umbilical to the SDC. Where there is no altimeter
fitted to the System, ALT could contain a fixed coil height that you specify during the configuration procedure.
FWD
Forward range measured to the target in when in forward search mode.;
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page xii of xiv
Tables
AMENDMENTS
OLD
ISSUE NO.
NEW
ISSUE NO.
DATE
2.3
2.4
15.01.2008
Added 350 Coil Tester section to Appendix E
2.2
2.3
14.06.2007
Updated default comms to RS232.
Included 350 drawings in manual.
2.1
2.2
16.02.2006
Corporate branding changes and SDC9 updates.
2.0
2.1
19.12.2003
Revised for latest software.
-
2.0
25.07.2000
First issue to cover SDC8 / DeepView / 440.
DPN 402197
DETAILS
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page xiii of xiv
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page xiv of xiv
1 – Introduction
1 INTRODUCTION
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System is a complete package of equipment that you
may install on board a remotely operated sub-sea vehicle (ROV). The System provides a convenient and uncomplicated method for performing accurate submarine
surveys on a tone-carrying cable. The burial state of the target has no effect on System operation.
This Manual describes the Type 2 TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
The Type 1 System differs only in the design of the sub-sea electronics pod (SEP)
and does not allow the System to be combined with the sub-sea components of a
TSS 340 or 440 System for operation in Dualtrack mode. The Type 1 System is no
longer available from TSS.
The 350 System includes a display and control computer that you should install
where you may see its screen easily while you operate the ROV. The display includes
information to help you guide the ROV along the course of the target. This Surface
Display Computer (SDC) makes all acquired survey data available to external data
logging equipment.
The 350 System operates in real time and provides accurate measurements at a rate
that allows deployment on board faster ROVs. The measurement technology used by
the System also allows it to operate out of water with no degradation in performance,
range or accuracy. You may therefore use the System for land-based or amphibious
survey applications.
This System Manual contains full installation and operating instructions and is an
important part of the 350 System. You should ensure the Manual remains easily available for use by those who will install, operate and maintain the System.
When supplied new, the sub-sea components are all fully sealed and depth rated to
the specifications listed in Section 8. To maintain the specified depth rating throughout the lifetime of the System, follow the maintenance and care instructions included
in Section 9.
Provided you follow the installation, operating and maintenance instructions included
throughout this Manual, the 350 System will maintain its specified measurement
accuracy with no need for further factory re-calibration.
Installation and operation of the 350 System are not complex tasks. However, you
should spend time to familiarise yourself with the contents of this Manual before you
start to install or use the System. Time spent identifying the task sequence now will
help to have the System operational in the minimum of time.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
Where appropriate, this Manual includes important safety information, which appears
as WARNING and CAUTION instructions. You must obey these instructions:
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 8
350 Cable Survey System
WARNING instructions alert you to a potential risk of death or injury to users of the 350
System.
CAUTION instructions alert you to the potential risk of damage to the 350 System.
Throughout this Manual, measurements conform to the SI standard of units.
For your convenience, this Manual includes several sections, each of which describes
specific features of the 350 System:
You should read sections 1 to 4 before you attempt to install the 350 System:
Section 1
contains introductory notes to describe the TSS 350 System.
Section 2
describes the 350 Cable Survey System and its sub-assemblies.
Section 3
explains how to install the surface and the sub-sea components correctly.
Section 4
explains how to complete the electrical interconnection between the surface and the sub-sea components. This section also explains how you
should select and establish a suitable communication method between
the surface and sub-sea installations.
You should read sections 5 to 7 before you use the 350 System to perform a survey:
Section 5
explains how to configure the 350 System for a particular installation by
using the DeepView display software.
Section 6
describes how to operate the 350 System during a survey by using the
DeepView display software. The software allows easy access to all the
facilities that you might require during a target survey.
Section 7
explains how to use the 350 System before, during and after a survey
operation. It also explains some of the factors that may affect the performance of the 350 System during a survey
Section 8
provides a full set of hardware specifications for the standard 350 System. This section also shows the operational capabilities of the 350 System under ideal survey conditions.
You should read section 9 if the 350 System fails to operate normally due to a suspected fault condition:
Section 9
provides a brief circuit description of the sub-sea components, and
includes flow charts to help you identify and eliminate faults by board
replacement. It also includes the mechanical and electrical drawings for
the System.
Section 10 contains the technical drawings for the system.
Follow the advice and instructions in Section 9 if you suspect a failure of the 350 System. If you cannot correct the problem, contact TSS for technical assistance. The title
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 8
1 – Introduction
page of this Manual includes the contact details for TSS (International) Ltd . TSS also
operates a 24-hour emergency customer support service managed by trained and
experienced engineers. Please make certain you have read Section 9 of this Manual
and that you have a full description of the suspected fault condition before you contact TSS for technical assistance.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 8
350 Cable Survey System
For reference, this Manual also contains Appendices that provide additional information about the 350 System:
Appendix A describes the operating theory of the 350 System.
Appendix B describes the options available for use with the System:
- The Analogue Output feature that you may use to provide control signals for an
automatic steering feature on a tracked ROV.
- Use of the TSS 350 System when combined with the sub-sea components of a TSS
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System and controlled by a single SDC. This is called the
TSS Dualtrack.
- A specialised TSS training programme available for those who may be involved in
any survey that uses the 350 System.
Appendix C gives some basic information and instructions for injecting a tone onto a
cable.
Appendix D gives operating and service information for the TSS ALT-250.
Appendix F includes a sample Configuration Log sheet, and drawings to show the
Run and Forward Search windows for use with the 350 System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 8
1 – Introduction
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
WARNING
The protection provided by the 350 System might be impaired if you use the equipment
in a manner not specified by TSS. For safety reasons, always follow the instructions
and advice included throughout this Manual. If necessary, contact TSS for technical
advice.
TSS has designed the 350 Cable Survey System primarily for use in surveying operations on submarine cables. In this application the System measures, displays and
records the position of the target relative to the ROV, and its depth of cover beneath
the seabed.
Operation of the TSS 350 System is unaffected by the burial state of the target cable,
the presence of non-ferrous metallic objects, or the heading of the search ROV.
The TSS 350 System consists of a surface control and display computer and the
depth rated components of the sub-sea installation:
Surface Display Computer
You should use the SDC to configure and control the 350 System. It communicates
with the sub-sea installation using bi-directional signals transmitted through the ROV
umbilical.
By interpreting the signals from the sub-sea installation, the SDC generates a clear
graphical display that helps you to guide the ROV towards the target and then to follow a course immediately above it.
Simultaneously, the SDC uses one of its four serial data ports to transmit the real time
survey information to an external data logging system.
Sub-sea installation
The sub-sea installation includes the following components:
❐
A sub-sea electronics pod (SEP)
❐
Two coil triads, each of which supports three identical receiving coils
❐
A sub-sea altimeter
❐
Mounting components to install the coil components on the ROV
❐
Cables you will need to interconnect the sub-sea components of the 350 System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 8
350 Cable Survey System
All sub-sea components of a new installation have a depth rating to the specifications
listed in Section 8. The main label of the SEP also confirms the depth rating of this
component. Provided you exercise all proper maintenance procedures explained in
Section 9, the sub-sea components will retain their specified depth rating throughout
their working life.
Refer to sub-section 2.4 for descriptions of the main sub-sea components of the 350
System.
During survey operations, the sub-sea installation measures the target co-ordinates.
These are:
❐
The vertical range to the target (VRT).
❐
The lateral offset of the target relative to the centre of the coil array (LAT).
❐
The altitude (ALT) of the coil array above the seabed, and the depth of target
cover (COV). To make these measurements, the 350 System must receive altitude information from an altimeter. Alternatively, where the design of the ROV
allows for a constant coil height, you may configure the System with this information instead.
❐
The angle of skew (SKEW) between the target and the coil array.
❐
The forward range to the target (FWD) when you operate the System in its forward
search mode. You must supply altitude measurements to the System before this
feature can operate.
The SEP performs the signal processing functions necessary to generate accurate
survey data using a powerful algorithm developed especially for this application.
Communication signals from the sub-sea installation therefore include all the relevant
survey information with no need for additional processing by the SDC.
The 350 System operates continuously in real time and provides accurate measurements at a rate that allows deployment on board faster ROVs. The System displays
the information that it acquires in a clear graphical format on the SDC. The SDC also
makes the same information available for serial transmission to an external logging
system.
When supplied new, the SEP, the coils, cables and other sub-sea components are all
fully sealed and depth rated. To maintain their approved depth rating throughout the
lifetime of the System, follow the installation, operating, care and maintenance
instructions included throughout this Manual. Provided you follow the instructions
included throughout this Manual, the 350 System will maintain its specified measurement accuracy with no need for further factory re-calibration.
1.2 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System uses an array of six identical sensing coils
arranged in two coil triads to detect the alternating magnetic fields that surround a
tone-carrying cable. The directional characteristics of the individual sensing coils in
each triad enable the System to locate the relative position of the target cable.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 8
1 – Introduction
The method used by the 350 System to locate and survey the target cable is insensitive to the effects of:
❐
Variations in the magnitude of tone current
❐
Terrestrial magnetism
❐
Burial condition of the target cable
❐
The presence of non-ferrous metallic objects in the search area.
1.3 QUICK START FOR SDC USERS
This manual describes the operation of a 350 Cable Survey System used with the latest Surface Display Computer. This software is based on Windows 2000, and a new
control program called Deepview for Windows. This new SDC is compatible only with
a 440 Pipe and Cable survey system when used in a Dualtrack configuration. For
users who have used the older generation of DOS software, the software will be simple to operate, however there are the following important differences:
❐
Windows user interface. The setting up of survey parameters, external logging
etc. is now performed via menus and dialogs.
❐
New forward search screen.
❐
Highly improved video overlay.
❐
Internal logging improved.
❐
Dualtrack configuration requires a 350 and 440 unit; the 340 is no longer supported.
The 350 SEP has not changed: the communications protocols, pinouts and ratings
are exactly the same. For this reason, both the old and new SDCs can be used with a
standalone 350.
1.4 WARRANTY
TSS (International) Ltd warrants the 350 Cable Survey System to be free of defects
in materials or workmanship for one year beginning on the date when the equipment
was shipped from the factory or from an authorised distributor of equipment manufactured by TSS (International) Ltd .
To ship the units between installation sites or to return them to TSS (International) Ltd
or an authorised distributor for repair, package them with care. TSS (International) Ltd
recommends that you should retain the original packing case for this purpose.
The use of improper packing for shipping any part of this equipment will void the warranty.
For information concerning the proper return location and procedure, contact TSS
(International) Ltd or an authorised distributor. The title page of this Manual lists the
contact details for TSS (International) Ltd .
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 8
350 Cable Survey System
The responsibility of TSS (International) Ltd in respect of this warranty is limited
solely to product replacement or product repair at an authorised location only. Determination of replacement or repair will be made by TSS (International) Ltd personnel
or by personnel expressly authorised by TSS (International) Ltd for this purpose.
This warranty will not extend to damage or failure resulting from misuse, neglect,
accident, alteration, abuse, improper installation, non-approved cables or accessories, or operation in an environment other than that intended.
In no event will TSS (International) Ltd be liable for any indirect, incidental, special or
consequential damages whether through tort, contract or otherwise. This warranty is
expressly in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The
foregoing states the entire liability of TSS (International) Ltd with respect to the products described herein.
Contact TSS (International) Ltd for information if further cover is required beyond the
warranty period.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 8
2 – System Overview
2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
You should read this section of the Manual before you unpack or install the 350 System.
This section tells you about the important checks and inspections that you should
make when you first receive the TSS 350 System. It also includes a brief description
of the main items supplied as standard with the System.
If you must ever exchange any of the System sub-assemblies, please make certain
you include a full description of the part you require with your order. If possible, also
include the part number of the component you require and the serial number of the
relevant sub-assembly.
2.1 Scope of Delivery
Page 2
Describes the items supplied as part of the standard TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
2.2 Unpacking and Inspection
Page 4
Explains the inspections and checks that you should make as you unpack the TSS
350 System.
2.3 Surface Components
Page 5
Describes in detail the surface components of the standard TSS 350 System.
2.4 Sub-sea Components
Page 9
Describes in detail the sub-sea components of the standard TSS 350 System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
2.1 SCOPE OF DELIVERY
The 350 System includes various sub-assemblies that you must interconnect properly
before the System will work.
Figure 2–1 shows a typical stand-alone configuration for the 350 System that has the
SDC installed on a surface vessel and the sub-sea components mounted on the
ROV. Table 2–1 identifies the individual components of the installation.
Optionally, you may use the 350 System as part of a Dualtrack installation. In this
mode, a single SDC controls the operation of the 350 Cable Survey System when its
sub-sea components are connected to a TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System.
Refer to Appendix B.2 for instructions to connect and configure the 350 System within
a Dualtrack installation.
Figure 2–1: Components of the 350 Cable Survey System
Sub-sections 2.3 and 2.4 below provide detailed descriptions of the surface and the
sub-sea components of the 350 System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 14
2 – System Overview
Table 2–1: Components of the 350 Cable Survey System
Item
Description
G
Surface display computer (SDC) with:
❐ DeepView for Windows display and logging software pre-installed on the internal hard disk.
❐ Auto-range power supply that accepts AC supply voltages in the range 85 to 265V (47 to 63Hz) at
250VA maximum.
❐ Modular 19” rack-mountable Industrial PC, VDU and keyboard/trackpad combination.
❐ 40GB of storage disk space.
❐ CD-ROM drive.
❐ 2 x USB ports on front panel of Industrial PC.
❐ Current-loop interface card (externally configurable).
❐ Video overlay card and dual-head graphics card.
H
Data cable for connection between the SDC and the ROV umbilical
I
Power and data cable (or ‘ROV Tail’) that connects the SEP to the ROV umbilical and power distribution
system
J
Depth rated Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP)
K
Port and starboard coil connection cables
L
Port and starboard coil triads. These each include three identical coils arranged so that the starboard triad
is a mirror image of the port triad.
M
Altimeter connection cable for the altimeter type in use
N
Sub-sea altimeter
CAUTION
Earlier versions of the 350 System and sub-sea altimeter were depth rated to 1000
metres only. DO NOT use these earlier versions of hardware for surveying targets at
depths greater than 1000 metres.
You may recognise the two types of SEP easily:
- Type 1 SEPs that have a 1000 metres depth rating show a
visible end-cap thickness of 6mm. They also have serial
numbers with three digits.
- Type 2 SEPs that have a 3000 metres depth rating show a
visible end-cap thickness of 11mm. They also have serial
numbers with four digits.
- The 3000 metre depth-rated altimeter is stainless steel with
a bright finish. The earlier 1000 metre depth-rated version
had a black finish.
- You may use a Datasonics altimeter with the 350 System.
The Datasonics PSA 900 has a depth rating to 2000 metres,
and the PSA 9000 has a depth rating to 6000 metres.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
TSS performs a series of careful examinations and tests on the electrical function and
mechanical integrity of the 350 System during manufacture and before dispatch. Special shock protecting cases safeguard the System during transit so that it should
arrive without damage or defect.
Retain the original transit cases so that you may use them if you must transport the 350
System for any reason. You will invalidate the warranty if you use improper packing
during transportation.
As soon as possible after you have received the 350 System, check all items against
the shipping documents. Perform a careful visual examination of all sub-assemblies
and inspect them for any damage that might have occurred during transportation.
Notify TSS (International) Ltd immediately if there are parts or sub-assemblies missing from your shipment. If you see any damage to the System, file a claim with the
insurers and inform TSS. The title page of this Manual lists the contact details for TSS
(International) Ltd. TSS also operates a 24-hour emergency telephone support line
managed by trained and experienced TSS engineers.
To avoid loss or damage to any components of the System, store all sub-assemblies
safely in their transit cases until you need to install them. Obey the environmental limits for storage listed in Section 8 for all sub-assemblies.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 14
2 – System Overview
2.3 SURFACE COMPONENTS
The SDC receives and processes information from the sub-sea installation. Its display
provides clear information to help you guide the ROV along the course of the target.
Simultaneously, the SDC makes the same survey information available at one of its
serial ports for recording by an external data logger.
Figure 2–2: Surface Display Computer
The main functions of the SDC are:
❐
To communicate with the sub-sea installation.
The method of communication used between the SDC and the SEP is user
selectable. The SDC has an external switch on the rear of the PC unit and the
SEP has internal links. Refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 for details instructions on communication configuration.
❐
To configure and control the 350 System.
The SDC uses the Windows 2000 operating environment. DeepView for Windows
software is used to configure the System after installation, and to operate the System during a survey. Refer to Sections 5 and 6 for full instructions to use this software.
❐
To display the survey measurements graphically.
The display on the SDC shows information that helps you to guide the ROV along
the course of the target. Refer to Section 6 for a description of the display features.
There are two options available for displaying information on an external video
monitor. The first is to repeat the SDC display at a remote location using SVGA
signals provided on a 15-way high density D-type connector. The second is the
video overlay which is transmitted as composite video or S-Video in either PAL or
NTSC. Refer to sub-section 4.2.4 for instructions to use this feature.
❐
To send the acquired data to an external data logger.
The SDC allows you to log survey data externally (for use by post-processing
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
engineers) and internally (to provide a simple record of the survey that you may
replay through the SDC).
You may also use the SDC and DeepView for Windows software to control a Dualtrack installation. Refer to Appendix B for details.
The SDC is a ruggedised IBM-compatible computer mounted in a purpose-designed
shock protecting transit case. The design of the transit case allows you to operate the
SDC by removing the front and the rear access panels. Alternatively, you may
remove the SDC from the transit case and mount it in a 19-inch instrument rack if this
arrangement is more appropriate.
Refer to sub-section 3.1 for full instructions to install the SDC.
Pay particular attention to the warning and caution notices that are included within the
SDC installation instructions.
The SDC has a keyboard/trackpad combination mounted in a retractable 1U tray. You
may use this to enter commands and System configuration parameters. The keyboard can be hidden when the system has been configured and it is not in use.
The SDC uses a 15 inch flat panel colour display also mounted in a 1U retractable
tray, shown in Figure 2–3.
Figure 2–3: SDC Display
Figure 2–3 shows the flat panel screen in it’s active position. When not in use, it can
be hidden in the 19” rack to create additional space in the rack.
Figure 2–4: SDC PC Console
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 14
2 – System Overview
The front panel on the 1U PC console, shown in Figure 2–4, contains the power
switch, 2 x USB ports and HDD, power and current loop indicator LEDs.
This module contains all permanent cards required to operate the SDC with the subsea components.
When TSS (International) Ltd dispatches the 350 System, the SDC will have the current version of the DeepView graphical display software pre-loaded onto its hard disk.
Refer to Sections 5 and 6 for instructions to use this operating software.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
CAUTION
You may adversely and seriously affect the operating functions of the 350 System if
you load unauthorised software onto the SDC hard disk, or if you attempt to use such
software with the SDC. You will invalidate the warranty if you attempt to install or use
unauthorised software with the SDC.
Do not load any unauthorised software onto the SDC. If you are in any doubt about the
SDC software, contact TSS for advice.
CAUTION
You might destroy logged data and program files on the SDC if you allow computer
viruses to infect the unit.
Computer viruses can pass from one computer to another when you transfer files,
either directly through a cable or by disk. To protect the SDC against this type of damage, always take the following precautions:
- Never try to use unauthorised software with the SDC.
- Never power-on or reset the SDC with a diskette loaded into its floppy disk drive or CD
loaded into its CD-ROM drive.
- Use an external PC running up-to-date anti-virus software to check diskettes or CDs
before you use them with the SDC. Use only virus-free diskette or CDs with the SDC.
You may install appropriate and approved virus protection software on the SDC if you
prefer. To maintain full effectiveness you must keep this type of protection up to date.
- Do not use any diskette or CDs with the SDC if you are unsure whether it is free from
viruses.
- DO NOT power-on the SDC if you suspect a virus has infected it.
TSS takes every possible precaution to prevent virus infection before shipment. If you
suspect your SDC has become virus infected, contact TSS for advice and then
arrange to return the SDC to TSS for repair.
The SDC accepts an AC electrical supply in the range 85 to 265V (47 to 63Hz)
through a 3-pin IEC power inlet port. The SDC will configure itself automatically to the
appropriate electrical supply when you power-on the unit.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 14
2 – System Overview
2.4 SUB-SEA COMPONENTS
The sub-sea installation comprises the following component parts:
❐
A Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP)
❐
A coil array with six identical sensing coils arranged in two coil triads
❐
Frame components to mount the coils onto the ROV
❐
A sub-sea altimeter
❐
Cables to interconnect the sub-sea components of the 350 System and to connect
them to the ROV electrical distribution system.
2.4.1 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
The SEP performs several functions:
❐
Power supply conditioning for the sub-sea components of the 350 System
❐
High-speed data acquisition and digital signal processing
❐
Data acquisition from a sub-sea altimeter connected to the SEP ‘Altimeter’ port
❐
Calculation of all target co-ordinates
❐
Communication with the SDC through the ROV umbilical using whichever communication method you have established for the System.
Non-volatile memory within the SEP stores certain installation-specific parameters
that the SEP needs. You may examine and change these configuration parameters
remotely from the SDC – refer to Section 6.2 for instructions to configure the System.
EPROM memory devices within the SEP store the software that controls all the SEP
functions.
There are two versions of the SEP available that differ only in their electrical supply
requirements. A label on the SEP identifies the electrical supply required by the unit:
❐
The standard SEP operates from a single phase AC electrical supply (45 to 65Hz)
in the range 110V to 120V (maximum power demand 3.1A when used in a Dualtrack installation).There is a 2A quickblow fuse on the PSU Board inside the SEP.
You must provide additional fuse protection for the equipment by fitting a 3.15A
quickblow fuse between pin 3 of the Power/Comms cable and the supply live.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.3.1 for instructions to connect power to the SEP.
❐
Optionally, TSS can supply a SEP configured to operate from a single phase AC
electrical supply (45 to 65Hz) in the range 220V to 240V (maximum power
demand 1.8A when used in a Dualtrack installation). You must include a 2A quickblow fuse in between pin 3 of the Power/Comms cable and the supply live if your
System uses a 240V nominal electrical supply.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
CAUTION
You might damage the SEP if you attempt to operate it from an incorrect electrical supply. Pay careful attention to the requirements of the SEP and provide a supply of the
correct rating.
A switched-mode supply inside the SEP generates the conditioned and stabilised DC
supplies required by the sub-sea electronics. The input to the switched mode supply
includes a line fuse accessible inside the SEP.
The SEP is a sealed unit with six ports:
On one end-cap:
❐
Power/comms.
This port accepts the AC electrical supply from the ROV. It also carries the communication signals that pass between the sub-sea installation and the SDC.
❐
Altimeter.
You may connect the TSS or the Datasonics sub-sea altimeter directly to this port.
The port provides DC power to operate these types of altimeter and a signal path
for their RS232 communications.
❐
Aux Output.
You must use this port to connect the 350 SEP to the 440 System if you intend to
use your 350 System in a Dualtrack installation. Refer to Appendix B for a description of the Dualtrack System. If you do not make any electrical connections to the
‘Aux Output’ port you must leave the blanking plug securely attached to it.
❐
Sensor
The 350 System does not use this port. Leave the blanking plug securely attached
to the Sensor port.
On the other end-cap:
There are two electrically identical connection ports for connection to the two coil triads. You must connect each coil to its correct port on the SEP. Refer to sub-section 4.1.4 for instructions to connect the coils.
CAUTION
You might damage the SEP if you leave any port exposed to sea water during deployment on the ROV, even if you are not using the 350 System.
You must fit the supplied blanking plugs to any port on the SEP that you will not be
using during ROV deployment.
Refer to sub-section 3.2.1 for instructions to install the SEP on the ROV.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 14
2 – System Overview
Important hardware and software differences exist between the Type 1 and the Type 2
SEP and these units are NOT interchangeable. You may identify the Type 2 SEP
described throughout this Manual by the ‘AUX OUTPUT’ port on one end-cap. The
Type 1 SEP does not include this port.
Contact TSS for advice if you wish to upgrade an existing Type 1 System to a Type 2
System so that you may use it within a Dualtrack installation. Refer to Appendix B for a
description of the Dualtrack System.
2.4.2 Sensing Coils
TSS supplies the coil triads already assembled and ready for you to install on the ROV.
Labels identify each triad as either the port or the starboard unit – you must install the
coil triads on their correct side of the ROV.
During a cable survey, the signals detected by the coils might fall to extremely low
levels (less than 5µV). To improve the overall signal-to-noise ratio received by the
SEP, each sensing coil has a low-noise pre-amplifier built into its connector assembly.
CAUTION
TSS matches the coils and their pre-amplifiers carefully during manufacture. The individual coils have no user-serviceable parts inside. DO NOT open the coils or remove
their connector assemblies for any reason.
During the manufacturing process, TSS calibrates each coil carefully with its associated pre-amplifier. The coils require no further calibration after manufacture.
The measurement process of the 350 Cable Survey System relies upon triangulation
using the coil separation distance and information derived from the received signals.
For this process to work accurately you must install and connect the coils correctly.
Refer to sub-section 3.2.2 for important instructions on how to construct the coil triads
and mount them on an ROV.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
2.4.2.1 Sensing Coil Components
Figure 2–5 shows the components of a single coil triad. Note that you will use an
additional clamp and bolts to secure the coil triad to the mounting bar – see sub-section 3.2.2.2 for details. Figure 2–5 does not show the additional clamp and bolts.
Figure 2–5: Components of a coil triad
GH
The coil triad consists of a central alignment support block G and three separate clamps H, all manufactured from nylon.
IJ
K
All sensing coils in the array are nominally identical, with any slight differences compensated by a calibration
procedure during manufacture. The windings of the sensing coils I are inside sealed cylinders. To maintain
the correct relative positions of the coils, each cylinder has a recess machined into its surface that engages
with a locating screw K in the alignment support block. The clamps H and their bolts J secure the three
coils into the alignment support block. Additional horizontal and vertical grooves machined into the block allow
you to mount the assembled coil triad onto the support bar.
LM
NO
The standard connection cable L is 4 metres long. Three 8-way connectors M terminate the cable and allow
connection to the sensing coils. A single 12-way connector N allows connection to the SEP. The cable splice
is inside a sealed junction O, which has mounting holes so that you may attach it to the coil mounting bar.
See Section 3 for full instructions to assemble the coils and mount them onto an ROV.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 14
2 – System Overview
2.4.3 Altimeter
The main function of the 350 System is to locate and survey a target laying on or buried beneath the seabed.
If the 350 System measures the altitude of its coil array above the seabed, then it can
also deliver a good estimation of the depth of target cover. A sub-sea altimeter can
supply such altitude measurements to the 350 System.
You should remember that an altimeter measures to a point on the seabed directly
beneath its transducer face. This single-point measurement may not be the same as
the local mean seabed level.
This means that uneven seabed topography might degrade the quality and accuracy of
depth of cover measurements derived using a single altimeter.
For surveys where you must measure an accurate and certifiable target burial depth,
you should use an independent seabed profiling system. Log the measurements from
such a system separately and then use the post-processing operation to merge them
with data acquired by the 350 System.
On some types of tracked ROV, you may arrange to keep the coil array of the 350
System at a fixed height above the seabed. In these circumstances, you could avoid
the need for an altimeter by configuring the SDC to use a fixed coil height.
The standard 350 System includes a sub-sea altimeter. You will need to install this
unit on the ROV frame close to the centre of the coil array. Refer to sub-section 3.2.3
for instructions to install the altimeter on the ROV, and sub-section 4.1.5 for instructions to connect it directly to the SEP.
Refer to Section 6.2.2.1 for instructions to configure the altimeter after installation.
2.4.3.1 Alternative Altimeter Types.
If you cannot connect the TSS or the Datasonics altimeter directly to the SEP for any
reason, the SDC can accept serial data from the alternative units listed in sub-section
4.1.5.
If you use an alternative type of altimeter, you must provide a separate power supply
to operate it. You must also connect its RS232 signals to an available SDC serial
communication port.
Because the RS232 signals from the altimeter are for use over distances of only
15 metres, you must use an existing multiplexed link between the ROV and the surface vessel to carry your altimeter signals to the SDC.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.5.2 for instructions to connect an altimeter to the SDC.
Refer to Section 5 for instructions to configure the altimeter after installation.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
2.4.4 Remotely Operated Vehicles
The type and size of ROV you use for a survey will depend on the specific application
and on the capabilities of the survey vessel.
You may deploy the 350 System on a wide range of ROVs including:
❐
Free-flying ROVs of differing size and type
❐
Tracked ROVs or crawlers
❐
Trenching ploughs
❐
Towed sleds
See Section 3 for detailed instructions and recommendations concerning the physical
installation of the sub-sea components of the 350 System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 14 of 14
3 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
This section of the Manual explains how to install the surface and the sub-sea components of the TSS 350 System.
During the installation procedure, you should make a written record of certain parameters and retain them with the survey log for reference during the post-processing
operation. The DeepView display software on the SDC allows you to examine the
System parameters and to create a printed copy that you may retain with the survey
records.
There are many different types and size of survey vessel and ROV and it would be
impossible for this Manual to cover all installation possibilities. The instructions in this
section therefore represent a set of general guidelines and recommendations that
experience has proved effective.
IMPORTANT
Note that you cannot regard certain aspects of the 350 installation procedure as
optional: The instructions relating to coil location, orientation and mounting configuration are of critical importance to the successful operation of the 350 System. You must
follow these instructions.
3.1 SDC Installation
Page 2
You may use the SDC while it remains mounted in the shock-protecting transit case,
or you may install the SDC in a 19-inch instrument rack. You should install the SDC
where you can see and operate it easily.
3.2 Sub-sea Installation
Page 3
The success of any survey performed by the 350 System relies heavily on the care
you exercise when you install its sub-sea components.
3.3 Installation Check List
Page 13
This post-installation checklist helps you to avoid some common errors and omissions when you install the 350 System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
3.1 SDC INSTALLATION
WARNING
You must take precautions to secure the SDC when you store and operate this unit in
its transit case.
Protect personnel from the hazard of falling equipment and protect the unit from damage when the survey vessel moves due to the action of waves.
Install cables away from walkways and secure them so they do not present a hazard to
personnel.
CAUTION
To avoid potential damage to the SDC, make certain it has sufficient ventilation to dissipate the heat that it generates during normal operation.
If you mount the SDC in a 19-inch instrument rack you must allow a minimum 30mm
clearance between the top of the SDC and any other equipment mounted directly above
it in the rack. Also, allow a minimum 100mm space between the SDC rear panel and the
rear of the instrument rack to allow for connectors and cable routing
The SDC is a ruggedised IBM-compatible computer supplied by TSS in a shock-protecting transit case. You may operate the SDC in this transit case, or you may install it
into a 19-inch shock-protecting instrument rack. TSS does not supply the fixings that
you will need to install the SDC in a 19-inch instrument rack.
If you intend to change the communication method used by the 350 System, make the
necessary changes to the SDC before you install it into the instrument rack. Refer to
sub-section 4.2.2 for instructions to change the SDC communication method.
CAUTION
You might damage the SDC if you allow it to overheat. To operate the SDC inside its
transit case, release and remove the front and the rear access panels of the transit case
to allow effective ventilation and heat dissipation.
Although the SDC uses solid state electronics, the hard-disk drive and parts of the
display panel are susceptible to damage through shock or sustained vibration. You
must therefore exercise some care when you select a suitable location for this unit:
❐
Install the SDC where you have easy access to the controls. Choose a position for
the SDC that allows you to see the screen easily while you operate the ROV.
❐
If you do not mount the SDC in an instrument rack, use the original SDC transit
case to provide shock protection for the unit. Secure the transit case so that it cannot slide or fall with movements of the vessel.
❐
Make certain there is sufficient ventilation space above the SDC to remove the
heat that it generates during normal operation. If necessary, use an electric fan to
provide additional ventilation.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 14
❐
Do not subject the SDC to extremes of temperature or humidity, or to severe vibration or electrical noise. Never allow the SDC to become wet.
Obey the environmental limits listed in sub-section 8.1.1 when you store and operate
the SDC.
3.2 SUB-SEA INSTALLATION
The care that you take when you install the sub-sea components of the 350 System
will have a significant influence on the accuracy of survey data. Read the following
instructions carefully and ensure that you have all the necessary parts and tools available before you attempt to install the System.
The following instructions apply only to the standard components of the sub-sea
installation.
3.2.1 SEP
The sub-sea electronics pod has a hard anodised aluminium housing to ensure its
specified depth rating. Do not open the SEP during the installation procedure unless
you need to change the communication method used by the System. Sub-section
4.2.2.1 explains how to change the communication method.
If you need to open the SEP to set a different communication method, do this before
you install the SEP on board the ROV. To preserve the seals, always follow the instructions to disassemble and reassemble the SEP housing carefully. You will find these
instructions in sub-section 9.2.2.
There is a nylon mounting block attached to the SEP. This block provides a safe and
secure method to mount the housing to the ROV frame.
CAUTION
You might damage the anodised surface of the SEP housing if you attempt to secure it
to the ROV without using the proper mounting block. Corrosion will occur rapidly if you
damage the protective anodising of the SEP housing.
Do not remove the mounting block from the SEP housing. Do not attempt to secure the
SEP housing directly to the ROV framework without using the mounting block
The mounting block has machined slots that allow you to strap the complete housing
and block assembly firmly to the ROV frame. Stainless steel strapping is ideal for this
purpose. See Figure 3–1 below for details.
It is safe to mount the SEP in any orientation.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
Mount the SEP housing according to the following guidelines:
❐
Eliminate any possibility of snagging or damage to the SEP housing by installing it
inside the outer limits of the ROV frame.
❐
Locate the SEP housing so that you may install the cables easily between the
sub-assemblies of the 350 System.
❐
Do not apply sharp bends or other mechanical stresses to the cables during installation or operation. Route the cables between the components of the sub-sea
installation, and use plastic clips to secure them to the ROV frame.
❐
On small ROVs, position the SEP close to the centre of buoyancy to avoid upsetting the ROV trim.
❐
Tighten the mounting straps firmly so that the SEP housing cannot move under
the influence of ROV vibration or currents in the water.
❐
Refer to sub-section 4.1 for instructions to make the electrical connections
between the sub-sea components.
Figure 3–1: SEP mounting arrangement
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 14
3.2.2 Sensing Coils
Each sensing coil in the array detects the alternating magnetic fields associated with
the tone current in the cable, and supplies an output voltage to the SEP proportional
in amplitude to the received magnetic field strength. Because the output voltage is
derived from the tone on the cable, it is at the same frequency. Circuitry within each
sensing coil applies signal conditioning and pre-amplification.
CAUTION
The waterproof characteristics of the coils might degrade if you open them.
The pre-amplifier boards contain no user-serviceable parts. To avoid degrading the
depth rating of the sensing coils, do not remove their end-caps.
All vertical range measurements to the target position are relative to the coil reference
line. This line, shown in Figure 3–2, joins the centres of the port and the starboard lateral coils.
Measurements of lateral offset are relative to the centre of the coil array and are positive if the target is to starboard and negative if it is to port.
Figure 3–2: The coil array reference line
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
3.2.2.1 Assembling the Coils
TSS dispatches the 350 System with both coil triads already assembled.
Labels identify the port and starboard coil triads and indicate their correct mounting
orientation. The coil triads are NOT interchangeable. You MUST install them on the
ROV in their proper orientation. This installation detail is critical to the correct operation of the 350 System.
There are two numbers stamped onto the brass end cap of each sensing coil. These
numbers are the four-digit serial number and the five-digit calibration constant.
Record these numbers for use during the System configuration procedure described
in sub-section 6.2.2. Appendix F includes a suitable form to record these important
details.
You will need to refer to the following coil re-assembly instructions only if you have
disassembled a coil triad – for example to fit a new a sensing coil.
If the coil assemblies are both complete as supplied by TSS, mount them on the ROV
as instructed in sub-section 3.2.2.2.
To re-construct the coils after you have disassembled them you will need:
❐
An area of clear deck space at the front of the ROV
❐
A 3mm hexagonal key
❐
A 6mm hexagonal key
When you reassemble a coil triad, you MUST follow these instructions carefully. You
cannot expect the 350 System to deliver accurate survey measurements unless you reconstruct the coil triads correctly.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 14
Figure 3–3: Construction of the starboard coil triad
The following instructions describe the construction of the starboard coil triad (the port
coil triad is a mirror image of this). Refer to Figure 3–3.
1. Place the centre support block G on a clear, flat deck-space. Turn the block so
that there is a groove running left-to-right on the top face as shown in Figure 3–3.
Fit the lateral coil first:
2. Insert an M5 × 12mm screw M into the hole near the centre of the top groove. Use
a 3mm hexagonal key to tighten the screw lightly.
3. Turn the lateral coil I so that the 8-way connector is towards the left-hand side of
the centre block as shown. Place the coil into the groove so that the head of the
M5 screw engages with the recess in the coil body.
4. Place a clamping block H against the coil and insert four M8 × 50mm bolts L.
Use a 6mm hexagonal key to tighten the bolts evenly until the block supports the
coil properly. Do not over tighten these bolts.
Fit the fore-aft coil:
5. Insert an M5 × 12mm screw into the right-hand groove of the centre block. Use a
3mm hexagonal key to tighten the screw lightly.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
6. Turn the fore-aft coil J so that it is to the right-hand side of the centre block with
its 8-way connector pointing towards you as shown in Figure 3–3. Fit the coil to
the groove so that the head of the M5 screw engages with the recess in the coil
body. If necessary, tilt the assembly to the left to prevent the coil falling from the
groove.
7. Place a clamping block H against the coil and insert four M8 × 50mm bolts. Use a
6mm hexagonal key to tighten the bolts evenly until the block supports the coil
properly. Do not over tighten these bolts.
Fit the vertical coil:
8. Insert an M5 × 12mm screw into the vertical support groove that is farthest from
you and use a 3mm hexagonal key to tighten the screw lightly.
9. Turn the vertical coil K so that the 8-way connector is at the top. Fit the coil to the
groove so that the head of the M5 screw engages with the recess in the coil body.
If necessary, tilt the assembly forward slightly to prevent the coil falling from the
groove.
10. Place a clamping block H against the coil and insert four M8 × 50mm bolts. Use a
6mm hexagonal key to tighten the bolts evenly until the block supports the coil
properly. Do not over tighten these bolts.
This completes construction of the starboard coil triad.
Assemble the port coil triad in the same order. Note that the port coil triad is a mirror
image of the starboard:
❐
The lateral coil must be oriented and assembled with its 8-way connector pointing
to the right.
❐
The fore-aft coil must be located in the left-hand side of the centre block during
assembly, with its 8-way connector pointing towards you.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 14
3.2.2.2 Mounting the Coils
Figure 3–4: Coil mounting components
Mounting Strip
240mm
390mm
240mm
390mm
870mm
900mm
870mm
900mm
Outrigger
1290mm
2130mm
2160mm
Tie Bar
2130mm
2160mm
WARNING
The coil triads are heavy. To avoid personal injury, always use help when you lift or
move the assembled coil array.
CAUTION
If you mount the 350 System on the same ROV as a
TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System.
With drive current applied to the search-coils of the 440 System, large induced voltages can appear across the sensing coils of the 350 System.
Later versions of the 350 sensing coils included diode protection to avoid damage to
the coil preamplifiers. Refer to Appendix B.2 for details.
The accuracy of measurements made by the 350 System might degrade if any of the
following affect the characteristics of the electromagnetic field radiated from the target:
❐The
proximity of any material that is more conductive than the seawater. This includes a
metal or carbon-fibre ROV frame.
❐The
proximity of any large magnet such as that of an actuator.
❐The
presence of any conductive material between the coil triads that electrically shortens
the coil separation distance.
It is not possible to predict how the measurements will degrade when any of these
effects is present. To help avoid these effects, mount the coil triads at least 0.5 metres
from the ROV body.
The sensing coil triads are heavy. Ensure the mounting arrangements provide a rigid
and sturdy support to prevent the array moving or vibrating independently of the ROV.
Mount the coils on the front of the ROV at a height that protects them from collision
damage without degrading their vertical detection range. Typically, they will be
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
approximately one metre above the lowest point on the ROV. Allow a minimum distance of 0.5 metres between the coil triads and the ROV body.
Figure 3–4 shows the coil mounting kit with the following items:
❐
A mounting bar 2.0 metres long with a cross-section 72 × 70mm.
There are flat surfaces machined into the bar. These extend for a distance of
500mm from both ends so that, in these areas, the bar has an octagonal crosssection.
The bar has a receptacle groove 170mm long machined at the centre of one face.
Make certain this receptacle is at the bottom when you install the bar onto the
ROV. The receptacle is there to accept a small TSS altimeter if the System
includes one.
❐
Two clamping blocks identical to those used in the coil assembly (item H in Figure
3–3).
❐
Eight M8 × 50mm A4 stainless steel bolts. These are identical to items L in Figure
3–3.
Coil mounting method:
Note that when properly mounted both coil triads have:
❐
Their vertical coils towards the front of the ROV, with their connectors at the top.
❐
Their fore-aft coils farthest from the ROV centre-line with their connectors pointing
towards the rear.
❐
Their lateral coils in the top groove of the centre block, with their connectors pointing inboard.
1. Use stainless steel U-bolts to attach the mounting bar to the front of the ROV.
Adjust the mounting bar until it is level and centred relative to the ROV. Tighten
the U-bolts firmly to stop the bar moving or vibrating during survey operations.
2. Fit the port coil triad to the port end of the mounting bar where the machined flats
give the bar an octagonal cross section. Locate the coil assembly so that the
mounting bar engages in the lateral groove at the bottom of the centre support
block. The coil triad will be a very tight fit against the mounting bar and
might be difficult to install. There are arrows on the coil identification label to
show the forward direction of the coil triad.
3. Use a clamping block to secure the bottom of the port coil triad to the mounting
bar. Use a 6mm hexagonal key to tighten the four M8 bolts lightly. Do not tighten
these bolts fully until you have installed the complete coil array and you have set
the coil separation distance.
4. Follow the same procedure explained in paragraphs 2 and 3 above and fit the
starboard coil triad to the starboard end of the mounting bar.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 14
5. The design of the mounting bar allows you to adjust the distance between the coil
triads anywhere from approximately 1 metre to nearly 2 metres while maintaining
their correct alignment.
Slide the two coil triads on the mounting bar until they are at the correct separation
distance (between 1m and 1.76m). Make certain the coils are equally spaced about
the ROV centre line. Tighten all the securing bolts of both clamping blocks evenly. Do
not over tighten these bolts.
The coil identification labels have reference marks
to simplify measurement of the coil separation
distance. Measure and record the distance
between the reference marks so that you may configure the DeepView with this important information.
PORT
TOP
FORWARD
FORWARD
Also, record the serial numbers and calibration
constants for each of the six sensing coils. You Coil separation reference
will find these numbers stamped on the brass end caps of the individual sensing coils.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.4 for instructions to complete the electrical installation of the
coil triads.
Appendix C includes an example of a form that you may use to record the coil separation distance, the coil serial numbers and their calibration constants. This is important information that you must use to configure the 350 System correctly.
3.2.3 Altimeter Installation
When you use an altimeter with the 350 System, install it according to the following
guidelines:
❐
Install the altimeter as close as possible to the centre of the coil array.
❐
Make certain the altimeter has a clear vertical view to the seabed across its entire
beam width.
❐
When you select a position for the altimeter, make allowance for its minimum
measurement range capability.
❐
Measure and record any vertical offset between the transducer face of the altimeter and the reference line of the coil array (as defined in Figure 3–2). You will use
this information to configure the display software.
❐
Use stainless steel clips to secure the altimeter to the ROV frame so that it does
not move or vibrate independently.
❐
Do not install the altimeter at the opposite end of the ROV to the coils. If you do
not follow this advice, there is a possibility that the survey data will contain errors
caused by pitch of the ROV or uneven seabed topography. See the explanation
below for details.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
Errors can arise in the measurement of depth of cover caused by horizontal offset
between the altimeter and the centre of the coil array. In the example shown in Figure
3–5 there are altimeters located at ‘A’ and ‘B’. Because of the seabed topography
beneath the ROV, both altimeters supply totally different measurements of altitude.
Note that, although the measurements of target position supplied by the 350 System
remain accurate, errors in depth of cover measurements will vary according to the
altimeter position and the seabed topography.
Figure 3–5: Effects of altimeter horizontal offset
The SDC display software cannot compensate for any horizontal offset that exists
between the altimeter and the centre of the coil array. You should install the altimeter
near the centre of the coil array in both the lateral and the fore-aft directions.
IMPORTANT
The altimeter provides information that is valid only for a point immediately beneath its
transducer face. When you survey over uneven seabed, TSS strongly recommends that
you use a scanning profiling system to determine the accurate seabed level.
With the altimeter mounted correctly, the 350 System will provide additional information and features:
❐
It will supply accurate depth of cover measurements with the target centred under
the coils.
❐
It will be able to operate in the ‘Forward Search’ mode. In this mode, the System
can estimate the range to a target that lies along an intersecting course ahead of
the ROV. See Section 6 for relevant details of the SDC display software, and refer
to Appendix A for a detailed description of the principle of forward range measurement.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 14
3.3 INSTALLATION CHECK LIST
❐
Follow all the installation instructions in this Manual carefully.
❐
Mount the coil triads in the correct orientation and in the correct place on board the
ROV. Ensure the coil array is central on the ROV.
❐
Protect the coil array from collision damage by mounting it approximately one
metre above the lowest point on the ROV.
❐
Make certain there is at least 0.5 metres clearance between the coils and the ROV
body.
❐
Do not allow any free movement in the coil triads, the SEP, the altimeter or the
cables.
❐
Always use the nylon mounting block when you install the SEP.
❐
When you select a location to install the altimeter, consider its minimum range
measurement specification.
❐
Avoid installing your altimeter where there is a significant horizontal offset distance between it and the coil array. Make certain there is less than 1.0 metres vertical offset between the altimeter and the coil array.
❐
Record all installation-specific configuration details in the Survey Log.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 14 of 14
4 – Electrical Installation
4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
This section of the Manual explains how to connect the SDC and the sub-sea components of the standard 350 System. You should attempt the electrical installation only
after you have followed the instructions in Section 3 to install the sub-assemblies of
the 350 System.
Also included in this section are detailed instructions that tell you how to change the
communication method used between the SDC and the SEP.
The standard 350 System uses 2-wire current-loop communications. To select an alternative communication method you must change the settings of links inside the SEP
and the external switch on the SDC Converter Card.
If you need to change the communication method you must make the necessary link
adjustments inside the SEP before you mount it onto the ROV.
4.1 Sub-sea Components
Page 2
To gain the best performance from the 350 System, you must interconnect the subsea components of the System properly. This sub-section explains how to do this.
Refer to Appendix B for instructions to connect the System as part of a Dualtrack
installation.
4.2 Surface Display Computer
Page 11
The SDC includes the DeepView for Windows™ graphical display and logging software that allows you to configure and control the 350 System.
This sub-section explains the mandatory and optional connections to the SDC. It also
explains how to change the communication method between the surface and the subsea components of the 350 System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
4.1 SUB-SEA COMPONENTS
WARNING
There is a risk of death or serious injury by electric shock when you work on the electrical distribution system of the ROV. Only a competent engineer who has the relevant
training and experience must make any connections to the ROV electrical distribution
system.
Power-off the ROV and isolate the mains electrical supply before you connect the 350
System to the electrical distribution system. Observe all relevant local and national
safety regulations while you work on the ROV and on the 350 System.
Do not reconnect the mains electrical supply to the ROV or to the 350 System until you
have completed all work and you have fitted all safety covers and ground connections.
This sub-section explains how to complete the electrical installation of the sub-sea
components.
Figure 4–1: System interconnection diagram
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
G
The SDC accepts an AC electrical supply in the range 85 to 265V (47 to 63Hz). The power demand is approximately 250VA.
H
Data communications from the SDC to the ROV umbilical. These can be 2-wire or 4-wire 20mA digital current loop,
or RS232. The default configuration is RS232.
I
Power and communications cable (or ‘ROV Tail’) from the ROV to the SEP. This cable has cores to carry the communication signals that pass between the SEP and the SDC, and power cores for connection to the ROV electrical
distribution system. Refer to Table 4–1 for details of the cable.
The maximum current drawn from the supply is approximately 3.1A (at 110V to 120V AC) when the SEP is
installed within a TSS Dualtrack System. When operating as a stand-alone 350 System, the SEP draws approximately 0.3A from a 110V to 120V AC supply.
J
All sub-sea connections are to sealed ports on the SEP. You must fit a proper blanking plug to any port that does
not have a connector before you deploy the System underwater.
K
The coil connection cables each have a single 12-way connector for connection to the SEP, and three 8-way rightangled connectors for connection to the detection coils. You must connect the three short branches of the cables to
the correct coils in each triad as identified by their attached labels ‘vertical’, ‘lateral’ and ‘fore-aft’.
L
There are three identical detection coils in each triad. Note the serial number and calibration code on each coil to
check that the SDC software includes the correct details.
M
Figure 4–1 shows the altimeter cable connecting directly to the SEP. You may connect the RS232 signals from the
altimeter to the ROV multiplexer and pass them independently through the umbilical to the surface vessel. If you
use this method, extract the signal from the demultiplexer and apply them to the COM2 serial port on the SDC.
N
You may connect the TSS or Datasonics altimeter types directly to the SEP at the ‘Altimeter’ port as shown. You
may use other types of altimeter with the System if you prefer.
4.1.1 Ground Connections
CAUTION
To prevent severe corrosion of the sub-sea components, you must make adequate
grounding provisions for them. If corrosion occurs throughout the System, performance will degrade and eventual catastrophic failure will occur.
You must provide a good ground connection at sea water potential on pin number 2 of
the 8-way ‘Power/Comms’ port of the SEP. Use good waterproof connectors or splices
to make the connection.
If you provide the 350 System with an inadequate ground connection, parts of the
System will act as ‘sacrificial anodes’ and will slowly decay during sub-sea operations. This will occur whether or not you use the 350 System.
To prevent corrosion affecting the System in this way, you must connect pin 2 of the
8-way SEP ‘Power/Comms’ port locally to the ROV using a ground connection at sea
water potential.
IMPORTANT
To ground the SEP use only a local grounding point on the ROV frame. Do not use a
core within the umbilical to ground the 350 System because there will inevitably be a
potential difference between the ROV and the surface vessel.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
These grounding provisions hold the 350 System at the same electrical potential as
the sea water. This prevents the occurrence of electrochemical action between the
System and the sea water and minimises galvanic corrosion.
4.1.2 Care of Sub-sea Connectors
To ensure reliable operation and to extend the life of the sub-sea installation, take the
following precautions to care for the sub-sea connectors used throughout the 350
System:
1. Keep both the connector and socket free from debris and salt build up.
2. Use soap and clean fresh water to wash the connectors, and then rinse them with
isopropyl alcohol (IPA). Allow the connectors to dry thoroughly in air before you
reassemble them.
Lubricate the mating face of the connectors with a very light spray of 3M Silicone Oil
or Dow Corning #111 valve lubricant or equivalent. Do not use grease.
CAUTION
Some silicone lubricants will crystallise when you subject them to sea water under
pressure. When this happens, the seals of the connector will degrade and allow water
to penetrate.
To avoid damage to the connectors, use only the lubricant oils mentioned above, or
equivalent oils that the manufacturer approves specifically for use on deep-sea connectors and seals. When you apply the lubricant oil, use a very thin coating only.
4.1.3 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
The SEP performs all the following functions:
❐
Supplying power for the sub-sea installation
❐
Signal processing
❐
Calculating the target co-ordinates
❐
Communicating with a sub-sea altimeter connected directly to the SEP
❐
Communicating with the SDC through the ROV umbilical
❐
Interfacing with the TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey Systems (when you use the
350 System within a Dualtrack installation).
The SEP has six ports that allow connection to the various sub-sea components of
the installation.
On one end cap:
❐
Port coil triad connection
❐
Starboard coil triad connection
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
On the other end cap:
❐
Power input and communications link
❐
Altimeter connection
❐
Connection for a TSS attitude sensor. The current version of 350 software does
not support this facility. DO NOT remove the blanking plug from this port.
❐
Auxiliary input connection (for use when you use the 350 System in a Dualtrack
installation). Refer to Appendix B for appropriate instructions.
CAUTION
Water could enter the SEP through any port that does not have a connector fitted. To
avoid damage from water ingress, you must fit the correct blanking plug supplied by
TSS to protect any unused port on the SEP.
Before you assemble any electrical couplings in the sub-sea installation, inspect the
pins and receptacles of all connectors for signs of damage, contamination or corrosion. Follow the instructions in sub-section 4.1.2 to clean and care for the connectors.
Tighten the connector locking collars by hand only – do not over tighten these connectors.
4.1.3.1 Power Requirement
The standard SEP requires an AC electrical supply in the range 110V to 120V (45 to
65Hz) to operate. The maximum current drawn from the supply is 0.3A for a standalone 350 System, or 3.1A if the System is part of a TSS Dualtrack installation.
Optionally, you may request an SEP that operates from an AC electrical supply in the
range 220V to 240V (45 to 65Hz). This type of SEP draws a maximum supply current
of 0.1A for a stand-alone 350 System or 1.8A when the System is part of a TSS Dualtrack installation. Contact TSS if you require a 350 System that operates from the
nominal 240V electrical supply.
WARNING
Protection provided by the equipment might be impaired if you attempt to operate it
from an incorrect supply voltage. Operate the SEP only from an electrical supply of the
correct rating.
WARNING
The supply connector is a safety feature that allows the System to be isolated easily
from the electrical supply. Hand tighten the power connection only. Position the connector to allow easy access for disconnection.
The SEP ‘Power/Comms’ port accepts the AC electrical supply from the ROV and
passes the bi-directional communications between the SEP and the SDC. All electrical and communication connections to the SEP are through the Power and Communications cable, or ‘ROV tail’. Table 4–1 lists the pins of the connector on the Power
and Communications cable, together with the relevant core colours. Refer to this
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
table as you make the connection to the ROV electrical distribution system. All cores
in the cable are 1.34mm² cross-section.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
Table 4–1: Power and Communications cable
Connector Pin Number
(and Wire number)
Function
Core colours
1 (N)
Supply neutral line/L2
2 (E)
ROV ground (refer to sub-section 4.1.1)
3 (L)
Supply 110V live/L1
Brown
Pin 4 (wire number 1)
Comms 1
Orange
Pin 5 (wire number 2)
Comms 2
White
Pin 6 (wire number 3)
Comms 3
Red
Pin 7 (wire number 4)
Comms 4
Yellow
Pin 8 (no connection)
Spare – Linked internally to the cable screen
(wire identity S)
Link this wire to the cable screen
Blue
Green/Yellow
–
Green
*Refer to sub-section 4.2.2 for details of the communication connections.
Lay the Power and Communications cable from the ROV electrical distribution system
to the SEP. Route the cable along fixed ROV frame members and use cable clips to
secure it at regular intervals. Avoid applying any sharp bends or other points of
mechanical stress along the cable.
Follow the important advice listed in sub-section 4.1.2 concerning the care of connectors.
Connect the Power and Communications cable to the 8-way male ‘Power/Comms’
port on the SEP. Tighten the knurled locking collar by hand only. Do not over tighten
this connector.
CAUTION
It is very important to provide a good ground connection on pin number 2 of the cable.
A poor or a missing connection will severely degrade the performance of the 350 System.
You must make all connections to the ROV using waterproof connectors or splices of
good quality.
4.1.4 Sensing Coils
Each coil triad includes three identical but electrically independent sensing coils
aligned mutually at right angles and supported in a purpose-designed mounting block.
You must connect these coils correctly to their respective channels on the SEP.
TSS supplies two cables that you must use to connect the coils to the SEP. Each
cable has a sealed junction block and three short tails terminated with 8-way rightangled connectors that attach to the coils. Labels identify the three tails and help you
to connect them to the appropriate sensing coil. The cables are identical and interchangeable.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
Each coil cable has a sealed junction block where the three short tails connect to the
main branch of the cable. This block has holes that you should use to attach the block
to the coil mounting bar on the ROV.
There are two 12-way ports on the SEP that accept the connectors of the coil cables.
A label on the SEP end cap identifies the port and starboard couplings for the coils.
You must connect the lateral, vertical and fore-aft sensing coils to their correct 8-way
connectors on the cable tails. Labels identify the cable tails to help you do this.
The 350 System cannot measure the position of the target if you connect the coils
incorrectly.
Signal levels detected by the sensing coils may be extremely low (less than 5µV).
You must therefore take care to establish good cable connections when you install
the System. Follow the instructions and recommendations concerning the care of
sub-sea connectors in sub-section 4.1.2. Tighten all locking collars by hand – do not
over tighten these connectors.
Route the cables from the coils to the SEP by securing them along the ROV body using
cable clips. Avoid introducing any sharp bends or other points of stress, and ensure
that the cables are safe from potential damage from manipulators, thrusters or other
equipment on the ROV.
4.1.5 Sub-sea Altimeter
CAUTION
If you do not use the Altimeter port on the SEP, you must fit the correct blanking plug
supplied with the System to protect it from contact with sea water. The correct blanking
plug is TSS P/N 202208.
If you do not fit this blanking plug, rapid corrosion of the port will occur and the port
will fail. Sea water will enter the SEP through the corroded port to cause total failure of
the SEP.
CAUTION
The 6-way SEP ports for connecting the altimeter and the attitude sensor are identical.
To avoid possible damage and to ensure correct operation, connect the altimeter only
to the ‘Altimeter’ port identified by a label on the SEP end cap. This version of the 350
System does not use the ‘Sensor’ port and you must ensure there is a correct blanking
plug fitted to it during sub-sea operations.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
Choose one of the two available methods that you may use to connect the altimeter:
1. Direct connection to the SEP. Refer to sub-section 4.1.5.1.
The SEP provides a DC power supply to drive the Datasonics altimeter if you connect it to the ‘Altimeter’ port on the SEP.
2. Connection through the umbilical to the SDC. Refer to sub-section 4.1.5.2.
Available for use with all types of altimeter compatible with the 350 System.
These altimeters use RS232 communications. To send their signals through the
umbilical, you must add them to the ROV multiplex unit and extract them at the
surface. You must also provide a separate power supply for the altimeter.
Generally, these types of altimeter have different data formats. Refer to sub-section
7.3.3 for details of these formats.
4.1.5.1 Direct connection to the SEP
Route the cable from the Datasonics altimeter to the SEP. Secure the cable at regular
intervals along fixed frame members of the ROV. Avoid introducing any sharp bends
or other points of mechanical stress along the cable.
Follow the important advice listed in sub-section 4.1.2 concerning the care of connectors.
Connect the cable to the 6-way ‘Altimeter’ port of the SEP. Tighten the knurled locking collar by hand only. Do not over tighten this connector.
Use the SDC display software to configure the 350 System for use with the Datasonics altimeter connected to the SEP. Refer to Section 6 for appropriate instructions.
4.1.5.2 Connection to the SDC
Make the following provisions if you intend to use one of the compatible alternative
altimeters with the 350 System:
❐
Connect the altimeter to an available SDC serial port. Note that, because the
altimeters use RS232 communications, they cannot transmit their signals farther
than approximately 15 metres. Therefore, you must add the altimeter signals to
the ROV multiplexer and then extract them at the surface. You must then convert
the signals to RS232 for application to the SDC.
❐
Provide a separate power supply to drive the altimeter.
Refer to the manual supplied by the altimeter manufacturer for relevant connection
details.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
Connect the RS232 altimeter signals to the SDC through the 9-way D-type female
serial port. The pin designations for this port are as follows:
Table 4–2: RS232 connection to COM2
Altimeter signal
RS232 data from altimeter
RS232 data to altimeter
RS232 common
SDC COM2 pin connection
Pin 2 (receive)
Pin 3 (transmit). Necessary for use only with the OSEL Bathymetric System, where communications must be bi-directional.
Pin 5 (ground)
4.1.6 Roll/Pitch Sensor
CAUTION
Water could enter the SEP through any port that does not have a connector fitted.
The current version of the 350 System cannot use information from an attitude sensor.
Therefore, you must fit the correct blanking plug supplied by TSS to the ‘Sensor’ port
on the SEP. The correct blanking plug is TSS P/N 202208.
If you do not fit this blanking plug, rapid corrosion of the port will occur and the port
will fail. Sea water will enter the SEP through the corroded port to cause total failure of
the SEP.
The Roll/Pitch Sensor option is not yet available for use with the 350 System. Do not
make any connection to the SEP ‘Sensor’ port. Leave the blanking plug fitted to this
port.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
4.2 SURFACE DISPLAY COMPUTER
Refer to sub-section 2.3 for a description of the SDC and Section 9 for a minimum
specification.
The following sub-sections 4.2.2 to 4.2.4 explain the various connections that you
may make to the SDC.
CAUTION
You must route all cables to the SDC through the rear of the transit case. You must
open and remove the rear panel of the case to allow this.
Figure 4–2: SDC Rear panel with key to ports
4.2.1 Power Connection
Connect AC electrical power to the SDC through the 3-core electrical supply cable
and standard 3-pin IEC electrical inlet.
The SDC has an auto ranging power supply unit that configures itself automatically to
use an electrical supply in its acceptable range 85 to 265V AC (47 to 63Hz).
4.2.2 Communication Link SEP to SDC
Use the SDC port – ‘COMMS FROM POD’
The standard communication link between the SDC and the sub-sea installation of
the 350 System uses RS232. This is a 3-wire link suitable only for communication
over distances up to 15 metres. You may use this method to transmit data to the sur-
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
vey control room using the ROV multiplexer and an existing data link to the survey
control room.
The Systems default parameters for communication between the SDC and the SEP
are 9600 baud with 8 data bits, 2 stop bits and no parity.
These communication settings are valid even when you use 2-wire or 4-wire currentloop communications. This is because the SDC converts between current-loop and
RS232 communications through a special converter card. All communication between
the SDC and the sub-sea installation passes through the relevant SDC serial port.
Communication lines between the SDC and the sub-sea components are opto-isolated at both ends.
There are two further methods that you may use to establish successful communication between the SDC and the sub-sea components of the 350 System:
❐
2-wire 20mA digital current-loop
If the umbilical cable is of good quality, experience has shown that you may use this
communication method successfully through transmission distances up to 1000
metres.
2-wire 20mA digital current-loop is carried on a twisted pair within the ROV umbilical.
To avoid possible communication conflicts, the SDC acts as the ‘Master’ and the SEP
acts as the ‘Slave’ in this link.
To ensure reliable communications through the umbilical, select a twisted pair that
has the following characteristics:
Table 4–3: Ideal twisted pair characteristics for successful communication
❐
Twisted pair characteristic
Ideal value
Overall resistance
Less than 200Ω
Core size
0.5 to 1.0mm2
Inter-conductor capacitance
Less than 100pF per metre
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop
You should select this method when the umbilical link to the ROV is longer than
1000 metres, or where you cannot establish reliable communication using a 2wire current-loop.
You will need to reconfigure the SDC and the SEP to use this communication
method. Refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 for instructions to do this.
After you have made the necessary changes in the SEP and the SDC, perform a
simple communication check.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
The following tables show the connections that you must make between the SEP and
the SDC for each of the three communication methods. Refer to sub-section 4.1.3
and Table 4–4 on page 13 for details of the connections that you must make between
the SEP and the ROV electrical distribution system.
Table 4–4: Power and Communications cable – 2-wire current loop connections
SEP Power/Comms port
Pin number
Function
4
5
CLCL+
SDC ‘COMMS FROM POD’
(15 way) pin connection
Ù
ROV umbilical
3
4
Table 4–5: Power and Communications cable – 4-wire current-loop connections
SEP Power/Comms port
Pin number
Function
SDC ‘COMMS FROM POD’
(15-way) Pin connection
4
5
CL+ Input
CL- Input
Ù
ROV umbilical (Tx in SDC)
3
4
6
7
CL+ Output
CL- Output
(Tx in SEP)
5
6
Table 4–6: Power and Communications cable – RS232 connections
SEP Power/Comms port
Pin number
Function
SDC ‘COMMS FROM POD’
(15-way) Pin connection*
4
5
Tx output from SEP
Rx input to SEP
6
Common
Ù
Data cable
3
4
5
* You may connect RS232 communications directly to the 9-way D-type serial communication port COM1 on
the SDC.
To use current-loop communications you must reserve either one or two conductor
pairs in the ROV umbilical for the exclusive use of the 350 System. The System
includes a cable that you should use to connect the ‘COMMS FROM POD’ port on the
SDC to the twisted pairs in the ROV umbilical. The cable has a 15-way D-type connector for connection to the SDC ‘COMMS FROM POD’ port, and open tails for connection to the umbilical at a junction box.
See Tables 4–4 to 4–6 for the connection details of the 15-way D-type connector fitted to this cable.
When you connect the communication cable to the SDC, ensure that the supplied
jumper cable is fitted between the ‘RS232 TO COM1’ and the ‘COM1’ port on the
SDC.
If you use RS232 communications through an existing multiplexed link, you may connect directly from your de-multiplexer to the SDC ‘COM1’ at the 9-way D-type connector.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
4.2.2.1 Alternative Communication Methods
WARNING
There is a risk of death or serious injury by electric shock when you work inside the
SDC, the SEP or the PSU.
Only a competent engineer who has the relevant training and experience should open
any part of the 350 System.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the mains supply voltage before you open
any part of the 350 System. Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations
while you perform any maintenance work on the 350 System.
Re-fit all safety covers and ground connections to the 350 System before you re-connect the equipment to the mains electrical supply.
Many components within the SDC are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic discharge. You must take precautions against such damage: These precautions include
the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap. TSS (International) Ltd will not
accept responsibility for any damage caused by failure to take such precautionary
measures.
The standard communication link between the SDC and the sub-sea installations of
the 350 System uses RS232. This is suitable for communication up to distances of 15
metres. This method is practical where a multiplexed communication link already
exists between the ROV and the surface vessel, for example where you use a fibreoptic umbilical cable.
The alternative communication methods are:
❐
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop
Suitable for use with umbilical cables longer than 1000 metres, or where the quality of the umbilical cable prevents effective use of the standard 2-wire method.
In practice, the 4-wire method should be suitable for use with umbilical cables up
to 4000 metres long if the umbilical is of good quality.
❐
2-wire 20mA digital current-loop
If the umbilical cable is of good quality, experience has shown that you may use
this communication method successfully through transmission distances up to
1000 metres.
Configure the SEP
CAUTION
Many components inside the SEP are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic discharge. You must take precautions to prevent such damage whenever you open the
SEP. These precautions include the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 14 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
TSS will not accept responsibility for any damage caused by failure to take such measures.
If you need to select a different communication method, change the settings of links
inside the SEP before you install it on board the ROV.
Follow the instructions in sub-section 9.2.2 to open the SEP and gain access to the
circuit cards.
Identify the Processor Board and locate the five links LK1 to LK5 as shown in Figure
4–4.
Figure 4–3: Link detail shown using the same orientation as in Figure 4–4
Figure 4–4: Link location on the SEP processor board
The links LK1 to LK5 are identical. Each set of links has a jumper that connects pairs
of pins ‘A’ to ‘D’ as appropriate. Remove each of these jumpers from LK1 to LK5 in
turn and fit them on the link pins appropriate for the selected communication method:
Table 4–7: Link settings for LK1 to LK5
Communication method
Pin pairs (see Figure 4–3)
RS232
A
RS422
B
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 15 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
Table 4–7: Link settings for LK1 to LK5
Communication method
Pin pairs (see Figure 4–3)
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop
C
2-wire 20mA digital current-loop (standard)
D
All five links have the same identification sequence and must be set identically. DO
NOT FORGET to set the jumper on link LK1, which is located away from links LK2 to
LK5 on the board.
Once you have set all the links, follow the instructions in sub-section 9.2.2 to reassemble the SEP.
It is a good idea to keep the links on the spare Processor Board set identically to the
Converter Card in the SDC. This avoids potential communication problems if you need
to replace the Processor Board from the field support kit during a survey.
Configure the SDC
WARNING
There is a risk of death or serious injury by electric shock when you work inside the
SDC or the SEP.
Only a competent engineer who has the relevant training and experience should open
the SDC or the SEP.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the mains electrical supply before you open
the SDC or the SEP. Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while
you perform any maintenance work on the 350 System.
Re-fit all safety covers and ground connections to the 350 System before you re-connect the equipment to the mains electrical supply.
You do not need to change the setting on the Converter Card if you use RS232 communications connected directly to a 9-way D-type serial port of the SDC.
To change the communication method you will need to configure the external switch
on the Current Loop Converter Card of the SDC.
After you have changed the communication method, perform a communications check
between the SDC and the sub-sea installation.
You must perform a communication check as part of the pre-dive tests. Refer to subsection 7.2.1 for details of the recommended pre-dive test procedure.
4.2.3 Interface to Data Logger
During normal survey operations, the 350 System acquires data at a rate of approximately 1MB per hour. You should arrange to record the official survey log on a suitable data logger.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 16 of 18
4 – Electrical Installation
For your convenience and for test purposes, the 350 System can also create a logged
record internally on the SDC hard disk. Data stored using the internal logging facility
does not possess the same format as that transmitted to the external data logger, and
you should not use it as the primary survey log. Internal logging allows you to record
the survey and then to ‘replay’ the file subsequently using DeepView on the SDC.
You cannot replay external log files through the SDC in this way.
The internal logging facility on the 350 System is for your convenience and for test purposes only. Do not use it as the principal survey logging tool.
Unless otherwise stated, this Manual describes the external logging facility of the 350
System.
Refer to sub-section 7.3.2 for a description of the format that the 350 System uses to
log data.
Make a connection between the 350 System and an external data logger using an
available 9-way D-type serial communication port on the SDC. The pin designations
of this port are as follows:
Table 4–8: RS232 connection for a data logger
Signal to Data Logger
COM-3 on the SDC
RS232 input to data logger
Pin 3 (transmit)
RS232 common
Pin 5 (ground)
4.2.4 Interface to Video
Use the SDC ports ‘COLOUR CV IN’ and ‘COLOUR CV OUT’, or ‘MONO CV IN’ and
‘MONO CV OUT’, or ‘S-VIDEO IN’ and ‘S-VIDEO OUT’
1. Video input – Use appropriate input port for your format (COLOUR CV IN, MONO
CV IN, or S-VIDEO IN) These are clearly marked on the reverse panel of the SDC.
The standard SDC accepts video input in PAL or NTSC format from a camera
mounted on the ROV. Apply the video signal to the SDC through the appropriate
video input port. TSS supplies CV cables (dual phono to phono) and a pair of BNC
to phono adapters to assist video connection with the 350 System.
Note that you cannot display the video channel on the SDC screen.
The SDC mixes video images from the sub-sea camera with graphical information
generated by the SEP. You may view the composite image through the appropriate video output port.
2. Video output – Use appropriate output port for your format (COLOUR CV OUT,
MONO CV OUT, or S-VIDEO OUT)
The format of the SDC video output signal will match that of the input video signal.
That is if your input is PAL, then the output will be PAL. Similarly if your input is
NTSC then the output will be NTSC. Further the video output will reflect the specific connections used i.e if the video input is monochrome CV, the output will be
monochrome CV and will be provided via the ‘MONO CV O/P’ port (similarly colDPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 17 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
our CV input will provide via the ‘COLOUR CV O/P’, and S-Video output will be
provided via the ‘S-VIDEO O/P’).
Note A monochrome CV input may be applied to the ‘COLOUR CV IN’ to allow the colours of the overlay graphics to be viewed, however colour aberrations in the video output may be visible.
You may connect this signal to a standard video monitor using 75Ω screened cable. The
output can drive a single monitor or multiple monitors if you add a suitable video drive
amplifier.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 18 of 18
5 – System Configuration
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Before you power-on the SDC and the sub-sea components of the 350 System, make
certain that:
- You have installed the surface and sub-sea components correctly as instructed in
Section 3.
- You have made all electrical connections within the System using the correct cables
as instructed in Section 4.
- You have established an appropriate communication method between the surface and
the sub-sea components.
The SDC has all the software that you will need to operate the 350 System already
installed. This section of the Manual describes the features of this ‘DeepView for Windows’ display software that you must use to configure the 350 System.
Although you may access the majority of commands by using an appropriate
sequence of key presses on the SDC keyboard, you will find it easier to use the software if you use a suitable pointing device such as the trackpad supplied with the System.
In these instructions, key press sequences appear in square brackets. For example,
‘press [SHIFT]+[F4]’ means to press the Shift key and the function key F4 together.
These instructions assume you are reasonably familiar with the Microsoft Windows
2000 operating environment and that you know how to select commands and options
by clicking with the buttons on the pointing device.
This section of the Manual explains how to start the SDC and use the DeepView System Configuration Wizard to establish the correct operating configuration for the 350
System.
5.1 Software Installation
Page 2
How to install DeepView for Windows on an additional PC.
5.2 Power on Procedure
Page 3
How to start operation of the sub-sea and surface installations of the 350 System.
5.3 DeepView For Windows - System Configuration
Page 5
How to use DeepView for Windows to configure the 350 System for a survey operation.
5.4 Print Configuration
Page 8
It is important to print details of the 350 System configuration at the start and end of a
survey.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
5.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
The SDC supplied with the 350 System already has the DeepView for Windows software installed on its hard disk together with the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating
system needed to run it.
TSS (International) Ltd supplies a CD containing the DeepView for Windows software
with the 350 System. You may install this software, under licence, on a separate PC
to support the main installation on the SDC or to replay an internally logged data file.
The following instructions explain how to install the software on a separate PC.
If you do not need to install the software on a PC or on the SDC, go directly to sub-section 5.2 for instructions to begin using the 350 System and DeepView for Windows.
To install the software it is recommended that you read the readme.txt file on the CD
provided which will be updated with any enhancements or issues to be aware of prior
to installing the software:
1. Insert the supplied CD into the CD-ROM drive of your PC.
2. The software should start automatically. If it does not, within the Windows environment select ‘My Computer’ and the respective drive for your CD-ROM drive.
Within the contents of the CD-ROM you will find a README file and a setup program which will automatically install the software.
3. To use DeepView for Windows, double click on the TSS icon that the Install Shield
places on your Windows 2000 desktop.
Take the following precautionary measures to maintain the SDC and your PC in optimal
condition:
Check all the drives on your PC for viruses using current versions of an approved antivirus program.
Perform a Windows Scandisk and a Defrag session regularly.
Follow the correct procedures to close down Windows and power-off the SDC and your
PC.
NEVER install unauthorised software on the SDC.
NEVER make any alterations to the Windows registry unless you are entirely certain
that you know what you are doing, and have backed up the registry files ‘system.dat’
and ‘user.dat’. Inappropriate modifications to the Windows registry can prevent the
SDC from operating.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 10
5 – System Configuration
5.2 POWER-ON PROCEDURE
During its initialisation, DeepView for Windows searches for a valid initialisation file on
the SDC hard disk. If the file exists and the SDC receives compatible data packets from
the SEP, DeepView for Windows will begin to operate using the configuration details
stored in the initialisation file. If DeepView for Windows does not find the initialisation
file or if there are no compatible data packets arriving from the SEP, it will start the System Configuration Wizard to help you establish reliable communications.
For this reason it is usually better to power-on the sub-sea installation before you
power-on the SDC.
Power-on the sub-sea components of the 350 System:
All electrical power for the sub-sea components arrives through a single cable into the
PSU, which generates the following stabilised and conditioned DC supplies:
❐
All supplies necessary to operate the SEP
❐
Power for a suitable sub-sea altimeter connected directly to the SEP. If you connect your altimeter to the SDC instead then you must provide a separate power
supply for it.
❐
Drive current for the 20mA digital current-loop
Refer to sub-section 4.1 for instructions to make the electrical connections to and
between the sub-sea components of the 350 System. The System starts to operate
when you provide the correct electrical supply to the PSU.
Power-on the sub-sea components of the 350 System. At the SDC, the power switch,
CD-ROM drive, USB ports and indicator LEDs should be visible.
Check that the ‘C/LOOP’ LED shows red to indicate the presence of the 20mA drive
current in the communication current-loop. Because the SEP generates this drive current, the LED should show red even before you power-on the SDC. By showing red,
the LED provides two important visual checks on the System:
❐
It confirms that the SEP is receiving electrical power from the ROV.
❐
Because the LED is in series with the current-loop, it proves the loop is intact.
Note that the LED shows only that the current-loop is intact – it does NOT indicate
that there are successful communications passing between the SDC and the
SEP.
The ‘C/LOOP’ LED will show red only if you use either of the two available current-loop
communication methods – it will not illuminate if you use the RS232 communication
method.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
Power-on the SDC:
Check that you have connected an AC electrical supply of the correct rating to the
three-pin IEC mains inlet on the SDC (refer to sub-section 4.2 for instructions to connect power to the SDC).
Remove any disks that might be loaded into the drives. Operate the power switch to
power-on the SDC.
After you power-on the SDC, the ‘POWER’ LED should show green and the ‘HDD’
LED should flicker green as the SDC begins an initialisation sequence that lasts
approximately a minute. The SDC will launch Microsoft Windows and the DeepView
for Windows display software automatically after it has completed the initialisation
sequence.
Provided the software launches successfully, you will see the DeepView for Windows
opening splash screen. DeepView for Windows will then search for an initialisation file
on the SDC that includes details of the previous operating configuration. If the software finds the initialisation file and the SDC receives data packets from the SEP that
are compatible with that file, then it will begin to operate using the same configuration.
Otherwise, DeepView for Windows will launch the System Configuration Wizard that
allows you to define the operating parameters used by the System.
To start the display software from Windows, select Start➥PROGRAMS➥DeepView for
Windows➥DeepView for Windows.
The SDC is provided with a keyboard/trackpad combination. You may use a mouse or
the supplied trackpad to select commands and options from within DeepView for Windows. You may use the keyboard to enter commands.
Under some circumstances, DeepView for Windows may not be able to communicate
with the SEP even though the ‘C/LOOP’ LED is showing red. This might occur, for
example, if the characteristics of the umbilical cable are unsuitable for use with 2-wire
current-loop communications. You may then have to reconfigure the 350 System to
use a different communication method – see sub-section 4.2.2. See also the fault
identification sequences described in sub-section 9.3.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 10
5 – System Configuration
5.3 DEEPVIEW FOR WINDOWS - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Before you can use the 350 System for the first time you must configure the software.
This procedure can be enabled to run every time you open DeepView for Windows or
if your setup is consistent it can be disabled and accessed via “System Configuration
Wizard” from the configuration menu when DeepView is operational. The options that
you are able to configure are the following:
Figure 5–1: DeepView for Windows - System Configuration Wizard
5.3.1 SEP type
Define whether there is no SEP, a stand alone 440, 350 or whether it is part of a Dualtrack System. This setting determines the data format that DeepView for Windows
expects to receive from the sub-sea installation and sets the style of Run Window that
the software will use to display the System measurements.
There are four options for setting the SEP type:
❐
No SEP
Use this option to operate DeepView for Windows with no SEP connected. This
might be necessary, for example, if you wish to use DeepView for Windows to
replay data on a separate PC.
❐
440
Use this option to control a stand-alone 440 System.
❐
350
Use this option to control a stand-alone 350 System.
❐
Dualtrack
Use this option to control a Dualtrack System comprising an interconnected 440
and 350 System controlled from the same SDC. You should use this option even if
you intend to use only one of the Systems during the survey.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
5.3.2 Communication ports
Define the serial communication ports and their communication parameters. The SDC
uses the serial communication ports to communicate with the SEP and with external
devices such as the sub-sea altimeter and a data logger.
During System Configuration the only port that you have to specify is the Communication to the Sub Sea Electronic Pod (or SEP). Below is outlined a list of the COM Ports
and their default assignments.
The SDC has five serial communication ports that it uses to communicate with external and peripheral equipment. The standard assignations for these ports are as follows. You may change these if necessary.
❐
COM1 is used to pass serial communications between the SEP and the SDC.
DeepView uses a serial port for this purpose even if you set the 350 System to
use current-loop communications. The SDC includes the hardware necessary to
convert between these standards.
Note that the current-loop communications connects through a jumper link from the
current-loop converter card. If you decide to use an alternative serial communications
port for the primary communications circuit, then you must also move the link connection to the alternative serial port.
❐
COM2 (labelled ‘ALTIMETER’ on the rear connector panel of the SDC) is used to
accept serial data from any compatible altimeter that is not connected directly to
the SEP. The maximum range for RS232 communications is 15 metres. Therefore, to connect an altimeter to the SDC you must add its signals to an existing
multiplexed data link in the ROV umbilical and then extract them at the surface.
Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.1 for instructions to configure an altimeter and set its
communication parameters.
❐
COM3 (labelled ‘LOG O/P’ on the rear connector panel of the SDC) is used to
connect the SDC to a separate user-supplied data logger. You should use a data
logger to record the survey measurements acquired by the 350 System. Refer to
sub-section 6.2.2.2 for instructions to configure DeepView for data logging and to
set appropriate communication parameters.
❐
COM5 (is not available on the rear connector panel of the SDC) is used by the
SDC to communicate with the video overlay card.
DeepView for Windows allows you to set the communication parameters for each of
the serial ports. Choose settings that are appropriate for the connected equipment –
refer to the technical manuals of the attached equipment if necessary. Note that the
standard communication parameters for COM1, the communication link between the
SDC and the SEP are set to operate at 9600 baud using 8 data bits, two stop bits and
no parity.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 10
5 – System Configuration
The update rate for your System will reduce if you set a lower baud rate for this communication link. You should consider reducing the baud rate for this link only if you
experience persistent communication problems caused by an umbilical cable of poor
quality. Ideally, in these circumstances you should swap to using an umbilical cable of
good quality instead.
At this point the software will provide an analysis of the data status and will provide
you with a summary screen of the findings that it has established.
Figure 5–2: DeepView for Windows - Summary
DeepView will now be configured to operate with the 350 System.
Before clicking on ‘Finish’ you have tick options to select:❐
Show the pre-dive checklist when the System Configuration Window is closed.
❐
Whether the System Configuration Wizard runs when DeepView for Windows
starts.
If the box is checked, the System Configuration Wizard will be run when DeepView for
Windows starts. If the box is not checked and if a configuration file is available, the
configuration file will be used to configure DeepView for Windows.
DeepView stores the configuration details automatically in an initialisation file when
DeepView is closing down. This allows the System to establish the same configuration when you next power-on the SDC – provided it recognises the data format arriving from the SEP as being compatible with the stored configuration details. This
means that you should power-on the SEP before you power-on the SDC.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
5.4 PRINT CONFIGURATION
It is important to print details of the 350 System configuration at the start and end of a
survey. This information is also duplicated in section 6.2.1.1, which outlines the operating of DeepView for Windows.
Select File➥Print Configuration to send a copy of the System Configuration to the
Windows Notepad application. You may edit the details and print them from this application. An example of the print configuration via Windows notepad.
Figure 5–3: DeepView for Windows- Print Configuration
The ability to print the configuration is an important feature of DeepView. It allows you to create a
permanent written record of the configuration to supplement the survey logs.
Full analysis and post-processing of the raw data can be effective only if you retain a record of
the 350 System configuration at the time of the survey. Appendix C includes a suitable form for
you to record these details.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 10
5 – System Configuration
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 10
6 – Operation software
6 OPERATION SOFTWARE
The SDC has all the software that you will need to operate the 350 System already
installed and configured to start automatically when you power-on the SDC. This section of the Manual describes the features of this display software that you must use to
operate the 350 System.
Before you attempt to use the 350 System during a survey, make certain you have followed all the instructions in this Manual to install, connect and configure the System
properly. You cannot acquire valid survey data unless you have carried out these operations correctly.
This section of the Manual explains how to use the 350 System to conduct a survey.
The instructions consist of a sequence of suggested procedures that begins with the
pre-dive checks that you should complete and finishes with some suggested procedures to close down the 350 System safely and efficiently.
Refer to sub-section 5.2 for instructions to power-on the 350 System.
6.1 Configuration
Page 2
An overview of configuring DeepView for Windows and parameters that are used during a survey.
6.2 DeepView for Windows Operating Controls
Page 2
A detailed explanation of the menu functions, toolbar controls and display features of
the DeepView for Windows ‘Run Window’.
6.3 After the Dive
Page 28
How to close DeepView for Windows and power-off the 350 System correctly after
completion of the survey. This is important – if you do not follow the correct procedure
to close DeepView and Windows you might corrupt some of the data files on the SDC
hard disk.
6.4 Replaying log files
Page 29
An explanation of how to replay an internal log file through the SDC, and an explanation of the additional toolbar facility.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
6.1 CONFIGURATION
TSS (International) Ltd has designed the 350 System and Deepview for Windows to
be easy to use. A System Configuration Wizard guides you quickly through the procedure to choose the SEP type and communication parameters. However, some important parameters must be entered before the survey can begin.
6.1.1 Survey Parameters
To follow we have listed some key parameters that will be required to be set prior to
and during the survey. Details of setting these parameters are covered in the software
details in section 6.2.
Configure the 350SEP with the following information:
6.1.1.1 Tone Frequency
Set this value to the same frequency as that present on the cable. The range is from
zero to 200Hz. This value must be set accurately, or the system will not find the tone.
6.1.1.2 Threshold
Set an appropriate value for threshold.
High settings will make the 350 System less sensitive to noise but will also decrease
its operating range. The default setting of 100µV has proved to be suitable for the
majority of survey operations.
If you are in any doubt about threshold, leave the setting at its default value.
6.1.1.3 Coil Separation
Section 3.2.2 explains how to install the two coil triads on the ROV and adjust the
separation distance. Enter the separation distance in cm. The accuracy of the survey
depends on this parameter being entered correctly.
6.2 DEEPVIEW FOR WINDOWS OPERATING CONTROLS
TSS (International) Ltd has designed DeepView for Windows to provide full functionality when you use a pointing device, such as a mouse or the supplied trackball, to
select commands and controls. You may also access many software features by
using the SDC keypads.
The instructions that follow assume you to be reasonably familiar with the Microsoft
Windows operating environment. If necessary, refer to a relevant Windows user guide,
such as the one that accompanies the SDC, for instructions to use Windows.
6.2.1 How to Use DeepView for Windows
This sub-section explains how to use the software commands and tools during a survey. The instructions refer to the Run Window and to the various secondary windows
described throughout this section. DeepView includes an on-line Help structure that
summarises the advice and instructions included here. There is also a simple ‘Help’
panel, accessible by pressing function key [F1] from the Run Window, to list the func-
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 32
6 – Operation software
tion key short cuts that select some of the commands and tools described below.
Sub-section 6.2.4 lists the function keys available for use in the 440 mode.
Follow the advice throughout Section 7 for a survey procedure using the 350 System.
Menu commands
Table 6–1 lists the commands available on the DeepView Menu Bar, together with
their hotkey access codes and function keys if applicable.
Table 6–1: DeepView Menu Commands
Menu item
File
DPN 402197
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
Open /Close Replay
File [F2]
Specify the name and location of an existing internally logged file that you
wish to replay through DeepView for Windows. The Replay Window includes
the same features and as the Run Window and operates in a similar way. A
button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same function as
this command. You cannot use DeepView for Windows to replay externally
logged files.
New Log File
[F3]
Specify the name and location of a new file to accept the internal logging
record. File names can have up to 255 characters. They can include spaces
but must exclude the characters \ / : * ? ” < > and |. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar also performs the same function as this command.
Refer to sub-section 6.4. for a description of data logging.
Close Log File
[Ctrl + F3]
If you have an internal logging file open, use this command to close it. Once
you have closed the file, you cannot open it again to add more data.
Backup Configuration
This will prompt you with a dialog box to provide a name to save the current
parameters set to a file that can be accessed at a later date.
Restore Configuration
This will provide you with a list of any previously saved configuration files
that you can load.
Print Configuration
Use this command to send a copy of the 350 System configuration to windows Notepad. You should print the configuration details from that application at the start of the survey and again at the end of the survey. Retain the
hard copy prints with the survey records.
Exit
Use this command to exit the DeepView program and return to the Windows
operating environment.
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Table 6–1: DeepView Menu Commands (Continued)
Menu item
View
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
Run Window
[Ctrl + R]
Select this command to open or close the DeepView Run Window. You may
resize and move the Run Window on the SDC screen after you open it. The
normal condition is for the Run Window to be closed when you start DeepView. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same
function as this command.
Forward Search Window [Ctrl + F]
This function is described in section 6.2.1.3.
Toggle Height Scale
[Ctrl + H]
Use this command to modify the available selection of displayable vertical
ranges. The vertical ranges vary between the 350 and the 440 systems and
are as follows:
350 mode: 0m to 2m, 5m, 15m or 30m
440 mode: 0m to 2m and 0m to 5m.
DPN 402197
Toggle Swath Width
[Ctrl + W]
Use this command to alter the swath range for the 350. The available ranges
are 0m +/-2m, 0m to +/-5m and 0m to +/-15m.
Scope and Spectrum
Analyser Window
Use this command to open or close the Scope and Spectrum Analyser Window. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same
function as this command. The normal condition is for the Scope and Spectrum Analyser Window to be closed when you start DeepView for Windows.
Note that the data string transmitted from the SEP to the SDC extends
significantly in length when you open the Scope and Spectrum Analyser Window. This will reduce the data update rate. You should therefore keep this window closed unless you require it.
System Errors Window
Use this command to open or close the System Errors Window described in
sub-section 6.2.1.4. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs
the same function as this command. The normal condition is for the System
Errors Window to be closed when you start DeepView for Windows.
Terminal Window
[TAB]
Use this command to open or close the Terminal Window described in subsection 6.2.1.4. A button on the DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the
same function as this command. The normal condition is for the Terminal
Window to be closed when you start DeepView for Windows.
Video Overlay Enable
[Ctrl + V]
Use this command to select the Video Overlay function. A button on the
DeepView for Windows toolbar performs the same function as this command. The video overlay feature allows the SDC to accept input from a video
camera and to output the video image overlaid with the target co-ordinates
and steering information.
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 32
6 – Operation software
Table 6–1: DeepView Menu Commands (Continued)
Menu item
Configuration
Window
Help
DPN 402197
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
System parameters
[Shift + F2]
This command displays a dialog panel that allows you to establish the type
of SEP and the serial communications parameters. Refer to the following
sections for relevant details and instructions.
Altimeter
[Shift + F3]
This command displays a dialog panel that allows you to establish the physical and serial communications parameters of an altimeter used with the 350
System. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.1 for relevant details and instructions.
The System Configuration Wizard also displays a similar dialog panel.
External Output
[Shift + F5]
This command displays a dialog panel that allows you to configure the SDC
output to an external data logger. Set the type of data packet and its update
rate, and the serial port communication parameters.
Note that you must establish appropriate parameters for the external output
if you wish to use the video overlay option, even if you do not intend to use
the external data logging features.
Analogue Output
[Shift +F6]]
Not used.
Run Background
Compensation
[Shift + F7]
This command is not applicable to the 350.
Seawater Compensation [Shift + F8]
This command is not applicable to the 350.
Load factory Defaults
[Shift + F9]
This will prompt you with a caution box to confirm that you would like to reset
the software back to the original factory defaults. This will eliminate any user
parameters that have been previously configured.
Video Overlay Setup
[Shift + F10]
Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.4 for a description of the video overlay feature.
System Configuration
Wizard [Ctrl + F10]
This selection will return you to the set-up options screen that you have
viewed when opening up the software. Use of this option will result in all of
the parameters being reset to default.
Cascade
[ALT][W][C]
Use this command to arrange the various operating windows so that they
overlap but with their title bars visible. This does not affect the Diagnostics
Window or the Target Tracking Window.
Tile Horizontally
[ALT][W][H]
Use this command to arrange the various operating windows so that they are
next to each other horizontally. This arrangement allows you to see the
entire area of each window, although DeepView might resize the windows to
fit the available area. This does not affect the Diagnostics Window or the
Target Tracking Window.
Tile Vertically
[ALT][W][V]
Use this command to arrange the various operating windows so that they are
next to each other vertically. This arrangement allows you to see the entire
area of each window, although DeepView might resize the windows to fit the
available area. This does not affect the Diagnostics Window or the Target
Tracking Window.
DeepView
[ALT][H][D]
Use this command to open the on-line Help structure that explains the features of DeepView. The Help structure also includes some simple fault finding advice for the sub-sea components.
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Table 6–1: DeepView Menu Commands (Continued)
Menu item
Sub-menu,
[hot key access]
and Function key
Description
Pre-dive Checklist
[ALT][H][P]
Use this command to open the on-line Help structure that explains the
checks you should make on the 350 System before you start a survey. Subsection 7.2.1 also lists and explains these checks. You may access the
checklist from within the DeepView Help structure.
About DeepView
[ALT][H][A]
This command displays the version number of DeepView.
It is recommended that you save a configuration file for each survey. You can then
restore this configuration file to give the settings for the next job.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 32
6 – Operation software
6.2.1.1 DeepView File Menu Options
This section outlines the various displays that have been explained in the previous
tables.
File Options
Open/Close, New Log File, Backup and Restore Configuration options bring up a
standard windows file location box. In the example used is the Open Log Menu.
Figure 6–1: An example of a File Option menu
Table 6–2: Internal Data Logging
B) Internal Data-logging
Note that, when enabled, internal logging must record up to approximately 1MB of data per hour. Ensure that the receiving
disk has sufficient free space to accept this volume of data.
Logging Enable:
You must enable internal logging before you can use it. This is done by selecting ‘New Log File’
from the File options. The factory default is for internal logging to be disabled. Logging should also
be turned off when the survey is complete.
Logging Format:
The records of the internal logging format include alternately the co-ordinates and the signals data
(see sub-section 7.2.2) When you enable internal logging, by default the SDC logs all records.
The SDC adds a ‘time’ field to the start of logging and updates this at intervals of one minute. It
obtains this information from the SDC system clock.
You may add short comments (up to 40 characters in length) to the internal logged
record by pressing the annotate button on the Run Display screen. The SDC timetags and includes the comments in the internal log. The external logging record is
unaffected by these annotations.
Note that you may measure how much disk space is available on the SDC by going to
‘My Computer’ selecting the hard disk and right clicking on the trackpad button or
pointing device and selecting ‘properties’.
Print Configuration
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Select File➥Print Configuration to send a copy of the System Configuration to the
Windows Notepad application. You may edit the details and print them from this application.
Figure 6–2: An example of the Print Configuration via Windows Notepad
The ability to print the configuration is an important feature of DeepView. It allows you
to create a permanent written record of the configuration to supplement the survey
logs.
Full analysis and post-processing of the raw data can be effective only if you retain a
record of the 350 System configuration at the time of the survey. Appendix F includes a
suitable form for you to record these details.
6.2.1.2 Run/ Display screen
Main Window
The Run Window is the most important and informative display of the 350 System.
Anyone who will operate or maintain the System should therefore spend some time to
make themselves familiar with the layout of the window and the information that it
shows.
A fold-out drawing of the Run Window is included at the back of this Manual. Open
the drawing and refer to it as you read the following description.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 32
6 – Operation software
Figure 6–3: DeepView - Run Window
Controls and Features of the Run Window
Controls
❐
The Title Bar shows the names of the program and of the window. The right-hand
end includes the standard buttons to minimise, maximise and close the main
DeepView window.
❐
The Menu Bar includes the five menu headers described under ‘Menu commands’ on Page 2. To access the menu and sub-menu commands, click on them
or use the appropriate hot-key combination – [ALT]+[underlined hot-key characters]. The Menu Bar also includes buttons to minimise, maximise and close the
Run Window.
❐
The DeepView Toolbar includes the buttons described in section 6.2.3. This section outlines the various displays that have been explained in the previous tables.
These tools control the functions of the DeepView for Windows program.
❐
The Run Window Toolbar includes the buttons described under ‘Run Window
tools’ on Page 8. These tools control functions within the Run Window only.
Features – Rear Elevation pane
The rear elevation pane is immediately below the Run Window Toolbar and occupies
approximately 30% of the area with the window fully maximised. It has a light blue
background and shows the target G as a circle of fixed diameter, a vertical broken
white line H that represents the fixed centre-line of the ROV and the two search-coil
arrays I.
The circle G moves horizontally and vertically in the pane as the relative position of
the target changes. The scale J provides a visual reference so that you may estimate the vertical distance between the coil array and the target. CTRL H switches
between 30, 15, 5 and 2 metre vertical display scales.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
When the 350 System includes a properly configured altimeter, the top edge K of the
solid grey area shows the position of the seabed relative to the coil array. This area
expands and contracts vertically with changes in ROV altitude above the seabed. If
the design of the ROV allows you to configure the 350 System with a fixed coil height,
the seabed indicator will remain fixed at this altitude.
The Run Window includes a series of data fields L that indicate the instantaneous
measurements of coil altitude (ALT) above the seabed, lateral offset (LAT) of the target relative to the centre line, vertical range to the target (VRT) and target depth of
cover (COV). The 350 System measures VRT and LAT directly, with positive measurements of LAT representing a starboard offset relative to the centre line. Measurements of ALT arrive from an altimeter, or represent the fixed coil height if this is
applicable. DeepView calculates the value displayed in the COV field using COV =
VRT–ALT so that positive values indicate a target that is buried. All measurement are
in units of centimetres.
The solid white line M that separates the rear elevation pane from the ‘snail trail’ pane
(described below) has gradations every 1m or 5m, depending on the swath width.
Two broken red lines N extend down the window at ±2m of lateral offset. These show
the lateral limits of a quality control envelope applied by DeepView. To support efficient post-processing on data acquired by the 350 System, the software sets the
quality control flag in the data output when the target is outside this envelope. Refer to
sub-section 6.5 for a complete description of the quality control features.
Features – ‘Snail Trail’ pane
The snail trail pane is immediately below the rear elevation pane and occupies
approximately 60% of the screen area with the window fully maximised. It has a dark
blue background and indicates the lateral offset of the target, relative to the ROV centre line H, for the most recent updates.
Two data panels R and S show the received signal voltages. In Run mode, the voltages shown are measured simultaneously on the port vertical (PV), port lateral (PL),
starboard vertical (SV) and starboard lateral (SL) coils. The digital display panel S
uses scientific notation to display the signal voltages in units of microvolts (µV). The
bargraphs R use a logarithmic scale. The use of scientific notation and log. scales
allows strong and weak signals to be displayed simultaneously without the need to
change scale.
The red dotted lines on R show the threshold (section 6.1.1.2); on the drawing this is
the default setting of 100µV. When the signal falls below the threshold value, the bargraph turns red.
Panel O displays the SEP details, System Clock, System Errors, External Output,
Internal log status. Panel P shows the skew of the vehicle (the heading relative to the
cable).
A thick coloured line Q indicates the target position relative to the ROV centre line. As
the survey starts, this line extends upwards from the bottom of the screen until it
reaches a point near the top of the snail trail pane. The top of the line then continues
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 32
6 – Operation software
to move to the left and right as the lateral offset of the target changes while the
remainder of the line scrolls vertically downwards in a ‘waterfall’ style of display.
Segments of the line Q can have any of three colours:
Light grey Good signals supplied by the coils. The target is covered.
Dark grey
Good signals supplied by the coils. The target is exposed.
If the System receives no altitude information, a good target signal will always
appears as a light grey line.
Dark blue
The lateral range is outside 2m. Note that if the target moves outside the
lateral range of the display (swath width), the pipe will turn red: increase
the swath width to rectify this.
Features – Status bar
The status barO, located directly below the snail trail pane, alerts you to the operating status of DeepView and the 350 System. It includes the following information:
❐
Communication status.
This shows the DeepView operating mode (440 or 350) and the validity of serial
communications between the SDC and the SEP. For successful operations in the
350 mode this should always show ‘350 Data GOOD’.
❐
System time.
The system time is derived from the SDC system clock.
❐
System errors.
The status bar shows the total number of uncleared system errors registered by
DeepView. Use the System Errors Window, described in sub-section 6.2.1.4, to
see details of all the system errors registered since you powered-on the SDC, up
to a maximum of 600 lines.
Logging status.
Two fields in the status bar indicate the ON/OFF condition of the external output
(used for logging to a user-supplied data logger and to provide information for use by
the optional video overlay feature) and the internal logging.
Toggle Height Scale
Dependent upon specific survey requirements, the Height Scale Display J on the
Run Window can be modified. For example, if a small target is being tracked a
reduced height scale may be required. This feature provides the user with control
over the displayed height range.
The vertical ranges for the 350 System are either 0m to 2, 5, 10 or 15m.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Toggle Swath Width
Dependent on survey conditions, the lateral offset scale M can be changed between
2m and 15m. Note that the quality envelope will still be at ±2m.
6.2.1.3 Forward Search Screen
The Forward Search screen provides a useful facility for ROV pilots: as described in
7.2, this facility helps the pilot to steer the ROV on a track that intercepts the charted
course of the target cable. It is intended that the heading of the ROV is approximately
perpendicular to the track of the cable.
Used in this way, the 350 System will detect the target ahead of the ROV and will display an estimate of the forward range between the coil array and the target.
The forward range estimate relies upon information supplied by the coil array and the
altimeter. You cannot access this facility unless the system receives altitude information from an altimeter or unless you have configured the software to use a fixed coil
height. See Appendix A for a description of the operating theory behind this function.
Figure 6–4: DeepView - Forward Search Window
Controls and Features of the Forward Search Window
Heading Display
The main part of the screen shows the ROV H, from above, and circles I concentric
with the ROV every 3m, to a maximum radius of 15m. A yellow arrow in the centre of
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 32
6 – Operation software
the circles shows the ahead direction of the ROV. Superimposed on this is a representation of the cable G, showing its distance from the ROV and its relative heading.
The altitude, skew and distance to the target L are all shown at the top of the screen.
The “ALT” field gives the height (taking into account any offset) above the seabed as
measured by the subsea altimeter. If the system is configured to use a fixed coil
height, this value will be steady and reflect this value. The skew angle gives the difference in heading between the vehicle and the cable: a positive value indicates that the
ROV must be steered towards the port side to become perpendicular to the cable.
The distance to target (FWD) gives an approximate reading of the distance, in m,
between the ROV and cable, measured between a point directly below the ROV on
the seabed, and the point on the cable which is directly ahead of the ROV.
Vertical Display
The lower part of the screen shows the positions of the ROV, seabed and target in the
vertical direction. The process of estimating the forward range of the target requires
the System to assume that the target is uncovered and lying on the seabed. For this
reason, the target (represented by the grey cross G is always shown on top of the
line K representing the seabed. The vertical scale of this diagram M can be changed
using the “Toggle Height Scale” in the “View” menu, or the shortcut key [CTRL]-[H].
The distance to target is also shown on the graph as the line J. This distance is
always measured along the seabed, and is not the shortest distance from the ROV to
the target.
This window also displays the signal bars P and coil voltages O as shown on the
Run/ Display screen. However, the vertical and fore-aft coil voltages are displayed in
place of the vertical and lateral signal voltages. By observing these values (in particular the bargraph display), an experienced ROV pilot can detect and steer towards a
target before any other indication appears on the Forward Search display.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
6.2.1.4 Other Windows
Scope and Spectrum Analyser Window
Deepview for Windows can show signal data received using either ‘oscilloscope’ or
‘spectrum analyser’ displays.
Figure 6–5: Scope Window
The above screen shows an example of the 350 Oscilloscope Window with panels for
two active channels, Starboard Vertical and Starboard Lateral.
During operation, each of these display panels shows the signal voltage measured on
their respective channels against a horizontal time scale and a vertical scale of percentage of full scale or μV. In the example above, two panels are showing different
timebase scales: both represent the same frequency of approximately 100Hz.
Unless the signal from the target cable is very strong, you are unlikely to see a clearly
defined sine-wave oscillogram.
Figure 6–6: Spectrum Analyser Window
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 14 of 32
6 – Operation software
The above screen shows an example of the 350 Spectrum Analyser Window with
panels for two active channels, Starboard Vertical and Starboard Lateral. This shows
the system tracking a 33Hz tone. The trace shows the expected peak at 33Hz, a peak
at 50Hz (produced by the mains power frequency) and harmonics of these frequencies at 66, 99 and 100Hz.
During operation each of these display panels shows the signal voltage measured on
their respective channels against a horizontal time scale and a vertical scale in volts.
Note that the vertical scale is logarithmic: each division represents a 10 times
increase in voltage. The frequency axis can be either 25, 50, 100 or 200Hz. Select a
suitable axis to allow the tone frequency to be displayed. The data can be displayed
in two formats: either a graph drawn with a continuous line or bars representing the
strengths of each 1Hz band. To change between the two views, press the small graph
button to the bottom right of each graph.
The tone frequency is also shown on the display as a vertical white line. This can
assist in adjusting the tone frequency set in the Survey Parameters (section 6.1.1.1)
to that present on the cable. The threshold is also shown as a horizontal dotted line.
In the drawing, this is at the default setting of 100µV.
Using and understanding the Spectrum Display is critical to setting up and using the 350 Cable
Survey System. It allows a check to be made that the tone frequency can be distinguished from
background noise. It also allows the presence of noise sources to be determined and identified.
System errors
The System Errors window, shown in Figure 6–7, displays a list of all errors and
events reported by the 350 System. The list includes cleared and uncleared errors.
The window can include up to 600 lines of text, with a scroll bar that allows you to
search through the list. When the list includes 600 lines of text, DeepView for Windows will delete the oldest message in the list to provide room for any new ones.
Figure 6–7: System Errors window
The lines of text always have the format described in Table 6–3.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 15 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Table 6–3: System errors format
Notes:
1. Time and date information in the message line comes from the SDC system clock.
2. The five character Error Status field can contain ERROR, CLEAR or EVENT.
3. The message line can have any of four colours against the black background:
❐White
❐Red
indicates a cleared error.
indicates an uncleared error.
❐Yellow
indicates an event.
❐Green
indicates an information message.
The System Errors window includes a status line that has two data fields. These show
the total number of cleared and uncleared errors since you started DeepView for Windows.
Terminal Window
The Terminal Window, shown in Figure 6–8, allows you to send and view data to and
from the SEP and the altimeter. It has a toolbar, a client area that displays black text
against a white background, and a status bar.
The figure shows the Terminal Window displaying data packets from the 350 SEP in
the client area. If you select the altimeter as the active serial device, the client area
will show data packets from this device instead.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 16 of 32
6 – Operation software
Figure 6–8: Terminal window
Table 6–4: Terminal Window toolbar
Button
Function
Explanation
Enable/Disable SEP
polling
This button has a toggle action that pauses and resumes SEP polling with
alternate presses. With this button deselected, DeepView does not send the
necessary characters that request data packets from the SEP.
Terminal properties
[ALT][T]
Use this button to set the serial communication parameters for the active serial
device.
Connect
This button allows you to connect the terminal to the active serial device.
Hang Up
This button allows you to disconnect the terminal from the active serial device.
There is also a drop-down box that allows you to select the active serial device from
among those available. This box includes the option to use the Terminal Window as a
‘dumb terminal’ if necessary (also accessible by pressing [ALT][Down arrow] then
release [ALT]).
The status line shows the communication port settings for the active serial device.
Video Overlay Enable
Enabling Video Overlay is covered in section 6.2.2.4 along with details of the configuration options available.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 17 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
6.2.1.5 Configuration Options
Standard parameters
This option should be selected to configure the system parameters information.
Figure 6–9: System Configuration
6.2.2 Survey Parameters
This dialog contains the main parameter which the 350 SEP requires to track the tone
and find the position of the cable. To carry out an accurate survey, these parameters
must be entered correctly.
Tone Frequency
Set the tone frequency to the same frequency as the one on the cable. Enter the frequency of the tone in units of Hz. The system accepts values from zero to 200Hz.
Note that the rejection capabilities of the system allow you to set the tone frequency
accurately. An error of ±1Hz or more in setting the frequency could cause the system
to reject the tone.
You may improve the performance of the System in the presence of background
noise by using the Spectrum Analyser (Section 6.2.1.4) display to select a suitable
tone frequency.
Signal Threshold
Threshold is an absolute value in microvolts. The 350 system considers targets to be
out of range if signals from them are below the threshold setting.
You should determine the correct setting for the threshold empirically, considering the
level of noise present in the survey environment. Low values for threshold will yield an
improvement in the operating range, but will make the System more susceptible to
noise.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 18 of 32
6 – Operation software
Figure 6–10: Threshold does not apply to vertical coils.
Note that the setting for the threshold applies only to the signals from the lateral coils
(in Run mode). This is because the null-response form the vertical coils extends vertically downwards from the centre of each coil triad. Any target close to this nullresponse line will not produce an output from the vertical coil even when located very
close to it. For the same reason, the threshold applies only to the fore-aft coils in the
Forward Search mode.
Coil Separation
Set the tone frequency to the same frequency as the one on the cable. Enter the frequency of the tone in units of Hz. The system accepts values from zero to 200Hz.
Note that the rejection capabilities of the system allow you to set the tone frequency
accurately. An error of ±1Hz or more in setting the frequency could cause the system
to reject the tone.
You may improve the performance of the System in the presence of background
noise by using the Spectrum Analyser (Section 6.2.1.4) display to select a suitable
tone frequency.
The coil separation distance is a very important parameter. The accuracy of survey
measurements delivered by the 350 system depends on the accuracy with which you
measure this parameter.
Refer to Section 3.2.2 for instructions to mount the coils and adjust their separation
distance.
Tone Frequency Reminder Interval
To avoid potential deterioration in quality or loss of survey data you should perform a
regular check on the received tone signal and on the level of background noise.
Deepview provides three facilities that you may use to check on the quality of
received signals:
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 19 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
❐
The Run/Display screen (Section 6.2.1.2) and the Forward Search screen (Section 6.2.1.3) both include a display of the signal voltages received on each channel.
❐
The Spectrum analyser (Section 6.2.1.4) display shows a clear representation of
the received tone signal and the level of noise frequencies across the received
band.
❐
The oscilloscope display shows the actual received signal after amplification but
before signal processing. You may use this display to check for the effects of coil
saturation (Section 6.2.1.4).
At a pre-set interval, the System will remind you to check the tone frequency. Use the
System Parameters to set a suitable value for the reminder interval, up to a possible
360 minutes. The default setting is 30 minutes. A setting of zero switches off the
reminder facility, but you should not use this setting.
Coil Calibration Constants
During manufacture of the 350 system, TSS takes every care to match the coils and
their pre-amplifiers to each other. However, there will inevitably be some small residual differences between individual sensing coils.
Each of the sensing coils supplied by TSS has an identification plate that includes a
calibration constant. The 350 system requires this information so that it can compensate for the residual differences between sensing coils.
During the coil installation process (Section 3.2.2), you should have recorded the calibration constants for each of the six coils, together with their serial numbers and locations. The Configuration Log form in Appendix F includes a suitable space for you to
record these details.
TSS supplies the System with the port and starboard coil triads already assembled,
and with the SDC configured with the relevant calibration details. Use the System
Parameters window to check the calibration values are correctly configured.
If you exchange a sensing coil for any reason, enter the new five digit value for the
calibration constant in the relevant box on the screen. Do not change any other values.
Each of the six calibration constants will be different, and you must enter them carefully. The numbers include an error-checking element that helps to ensure valid data
entry.
6.2.2.1 Altimeter
The Altimeter option allows you to change the altimeter configuration for specific
installations and to view data transmitted by an altimeter connected directly to the
SEP.
To view data transmitted by an altimeter connected to an SDC serial communication
port, use the Terminal Window described in sub-section 6.2.1.4.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 20 of 32
6 – Operation software
Figure 6–11: Altimeter Configuration
Use the Altimeter Configuration Window to set appropriate parameters for your altimeter:
Altimeter
❐
❐
❐
❐
❐
❐
❐
❐
❐
❐
❐
Altimeter Comms
❐
❐
Disabled
Fixed coil height
Sub-sea TSS* (see altimeter comms below)
PSA 900**
PSA 900 + depth**
PSA 9000**
Ulvertech Bathy
Simrad UK90
OSEL Bathy
SeaKing Bathy 704
Hyspec 305
Altimeter connected via Sub-sea Electronics Pod (for altimeters marked * and ** above)
Altimeter connected direct to a COM port (for altimeters marked ** and all other altimeters
above)
Fixed coil altitude
If there is no altimeter fitted and the design of the ROV allows the coils to remain at a fixed altitude
above the seabed, enter this altitude in centimetres.
Altimeter offset
Enter the height difference, in centimetres, between the reference line of the 350 coil array and the
transducer face of the altimeter. Use a positive value if the altimeter is above the coils.
The Altimeter Configuration Window allows you to select an SDC serial communication port that you will use to accept data from the altimeter and to set its communication parameters. Note that the 440 and 350 systems can have different offsets.
Although a single altimeter is present, its height above the 350 and 440 coils will be
different.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 21 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
The altimeter test allows you to see the serial data transmitted by an altimeter connected to the SDC. The values shown will not have any meaning until the altimeter is
immersed in water.
Figure 6–12: Altimeter Test
Refer to sub-section 7.3.3 for a description of the data formats supplied by the compatible altimeters.
6.2.2.2 External Data Logging
DeepView for Windows allows you to record the survey data acquired by the 350 System in two ways:
A) External Output Configuration
Note that external logging is defaulted to on.
Output type:
In 350 mode, the system always outputs a sentence which combines the signal and coordinate
information.
See sub-section 7.2.2 for a description of these data formats.
Output Rate:
The SDC can transmit data to the data logger at either four records or one record per second. The
default setting is four records per second.
You should consider the available storage space and the desired linear track resolution for the survey before you decide between these alternatives.
External Output
Enabled
This box must be checked to enable the external output. If it is enabled, then a tick will appear
against the “external output” item in the “configuration” menu.
Configure External Serial Port
Options to configure, COM Port, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity and Stop Bits. See Figure 6–13.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 22 of 32
6 – Operation software
Figure 6–13: External Output Configuration and Serial Port menu
6.2.2.3 Load Factory Defaults
Selecting this option will present a dialog box. Acceptance of this dialog will result in
the SEP settings being returned to their factory defaults. Certain parameters within
DeepView will also be returned to their default states (see Table 6–5).
Table 6–5: Factory System Defaults
Parameter
Default Value
Tone Frequency Reminder Interval
30 mins
Video Overlay Parameters
COM5, 9600, 8, n, 1
External Output Comms Parameters
COM3, 9600, 8, n, 1
External Output Packet
Coords + signal, 4/second
Altimeter Comms Parameters
COM port not specified, 9600, 8, n, 2
Altimeter Type
Disabled
Altimeter Offset
0 cm
6.2.2.4 Video Overlay Setup
The video overlay feature was updated for version 8 SDC. It operates in the similar
way as the previous overlay by receiving a video signal arriving from a user supplied
subsea camera and overlaying it with the DeepView for Windows information specified by the user via the Video Overlay Configuration. The Video Overlay Setup menu
is available via the Configuration options and provides the options illustrated below in
Figure 6–14.
The video overlay has two possible modes. The first mode is where a copy of the
SDC screen (the Runview) is overlaid on the video output. This is selected with the
"Duplicate Runview" checkbox. The other mode is where selected information, for
example the VRT and target position, are overlaid. The positions and colours of each
of these elements can be fully controlled by the user.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 23 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 6–14: Video Overlay Setup
Dependent upon the user's requirements they can enable/disable specific information.
As shown, they are also able to set the colours of Text, Signal Bars, Signal Trail and
LAT Bar, modify video mode and input/output connection.
These additional options provide the user with more control over the display to
improve ease of use.
The display overlaid on the external monitor from the DeepView software is shown in
Figure 6–15. The video signal will be displayed behind this survey information where
the black background is currently shown.
Figure 6–15: Video Overlay Signal
The Overlay feature can be enabled/disabled either from the View options or by using
the icon on the toolbar.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 24 of 32
6 – Operation software
Figure 6–16: Video Overlay Enable/Disable button
6.2.3 DeepView for Windows Icon Tools
Table 6–6 shows and explains the command buttons on the DeepView for Windows
toolbar. You may access these command buttons by clicking on them with the trackpad or external pointing device. A tooltip appears to remind you of the button functions if you hover the pointer over a button, with the same information also appearing
in the status bar. You may also access some of the button functions by pressing the
appropriate function key from the Run Window. Sub-section 6.2.4 lists all the available function keys that you may use in the 350 mode.
Table 6–6: DeepView Toolbar
Button
DPN 402197
Function
and Function key
Explanation
Terminal Window
This button performs the same function as the View➥Terminal Window
command described above. The button has a toggle action so that the window will open and close with alternate presses. The normal condition is for
the Terminal Window to be closed when you start to use DeepView. Refer
to sub-section 6.2.1.4 for a full description of the Terminal Window.
System Errors Window
This button performs the same function as the View➥System Errors Window command described above. The button has a toggle action so that the
window will open and close with alternate presses. The normal condition is
for the System Errors Window to be closed when you start to use DeepView. Refer to sub-section 6.2.1.4 for a full description of the System Errors
Window.
Run Window
This button performs the same function as the View➥Run Window command described above. The button has a toggle action so that the window
will open and close with alternate presses. The normal condition is for the
Run Window to be closed when you start to use DeepView.
440/350 mode
These buttons are available only if you operate the 350 System as part of a
Dualtrack installation when you may use them to select the operating mode.
When you press either of these buttons, Dualtrack enables the relevant
SEP and disables the other. The Run Window changes to suit the selected
operating mode. Refer to appendix B.1 for a description of Dualtrack.
440 coil drive
Function key [F5]
This button is not relevant to the 350 System. It will be available if you are
operating the 350 as part of a Dualtrack installation: refer to the 440 System
Manual for further details.
Background compensation
This button is not relevant to the 350 System. It will be available if you are
operating the 350 as part of a Dualtrack installation: refer to the 440 System
Manual for further details.
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 25 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Table 6–6: DeepView Toolbar (Continued)
Button
Function
and Function key
Explanation
Video overlay
Function key [F3]
This button has a toggle action that enables and disables the video overlay
with alternate presses. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.4 for details of the video
overlay option.
Analogue output
This button has a toggle action that enables and disables the analogue output with alternate presses.
NOTE: this option is now obsolete.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 26 of 32
6 – Operation software
Run Window tools
Table 6–7 shows and explains the command buttons on the Run Window toolbar.
You may also access some of the button functions by pressing the appropriate function key from the Run Window. Sub-section 6.2.4 lists all the available function keys
that you may use in the 350 mode.
Table 6–7: Run Window Toolbar
Button
Function
Explanation
Show Run Window
When in Forward Search mode (Section 6.2.1.3), switch to Run/ Display
mode.
Show Forward Search
Window
When in Run/Display mode (Section 6.2.1.2), switch to Forward Search
mode.
Annotations
This button opens the text annotation feature available when you are creating an internal logging file. You may use the feature to add text comments,
of up to 40 characters in length, to the file. The comments will appear in the
status bar during replay of the file. The feature will not be available unless
you have configured DeepView to generate an internal logging file.
Help
This button has a toggle action that opens and closes the DeepView function help panel described in sub-section 6.2.4.
6.2.4 DeepView for Windows Function Keys
Sub-section explains the menu commands and toolbar buttons available from within
DeepView for Windows. You may access some of these commands and tools directly
by pressing the appropriate function key on the SDC. As a simple memory aid, press
the function key [F1] to see the help dialog panel shown in Figure 6–17. Note that this
dialog panel is NOT part of the DeepView for Windows on-line Help support.
Press any key to close the help dialog panel.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 27 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 6–17: DeepView function keys
Notes:
1. Function key combinations [CTRL]-[F6], [CTRL]-[F7] and [F5] are valid only when
you use the 350 System in a Dualtrack installation.
6.3 AFTER THE DIVE
Perform the following tasks after you complete a survey using the 350 System:
1. Print the configuration.
Select File➥Print Configuration to send a copy of the 350 System configuration
details to Window Notepad. Use this separate application to print the details so
that you may retain them with the survey records.
2. Close the logging files.
Select File➥Close Log File to close the internal log file (if you have made one during the survey). Command the external data logger to stop logging data from the
350 System.
3. Exit DeepView for Windows.
Select File➥Exit to exit the program. If necessary, use Windows Explorer to copy
the internally logged file to a separate disk to accompany the survey records. You
might need to compress the file using a separate program before you can transfer
it to a diskette.
4. Exit Windows and power-off the SDC.
Select Start➥Shut Down..., then choose ‘Shut down’ and press OK to close the
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 28 of 32
6 – Operation software
Windows operating environment. Wait while Windows closes and then power-off
the SDC when the screen tells you that it is safe to do so.
CAUTION
DO NOT power-off the SDC until it is safe to do so otherwise Windows™ will log the
fact that it was incorrectly closed. This will cause the SDC to enter a diagnostic check
automatically when you next operate it, extending the time that it takes for the 350 System to become operational after power-on.
If you power-off the SDC before Windows has closed properly, you might corrupt some
of the data logging files from the survey.
5. Power-off the sub-sea installation.
If you power-off the sub-sea installation before you close DeepView for Windows,
the program will register a communications failure.
6. Check the 350 System.
After you recover the ROV, perform all the post-survey checks and make any necessary repairs to the 350 System before you store it. This helps to ensure the System will be ready for immediate deployment when needed again. Use a fresh
water hose to wash deposits of salt and debris off the System.
Refer to Section 7 for a suggested survey procedure using the 350 System.
6.4 REPLAYING A LOG FILE
When you start to replay a log file an additional tool bar appears at the top of the run
window.
Figure 6–18: Replay a log file screen
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 29 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 6–19: Replay toolbar keys
Table 6–8: Replay toolbar function keys
Button
Function
Explanation
Toggle height scale
Function key
Toggle swath width
Function key
Stop / Play / Pause
Function keys
Increase / Slow down
replay speed
Function keys
Jump to previous / next
annotation
Function keys
Jump to previous / next
event Function keys
Goto time
Function key
Help button
DPN 402197
Same as ctrl-F1
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 30 of 32
6 – Operation software
6.5 QUALITY CONTROL
The Quality Control function of the 350 System defines an envelope within which the
measurements meet the specifications for accuracy listed in Section 8.
Whenever the co-ordinates of the target fall outside the limits of the Quality Control
envelope, the following occurs:
❐
The target shown on the Run Display screen changes colour.
❐
A message appears on the screen to identify the reason for quality control failure.
❐
The output strings to an external data logger include the quality control indicator
and identification number. The two-digit identification number allows post-processing engineers to identify the quality control failure. Refer to sub-section 7.3.1 for
details of the QC check code.
❐
The audible alarm on the SDC sounds (if you have enabled this feature).
The extremities of the Quality Control envelope are as follows:
A) Lateral extremities:
If the target falls outside a swath range of ±2.0m from the centre of the coil array, then
the Quality Control flag will be set. These extremities appear on the Run Display
screen as two vertical broken red lines.
B) Vertical extremity:
If the signal strength on either of the lateral sensing coils falls to below 50µV, then the
Quality Control flag will be set.
The quality control flag does NOT mean that the measurements contain errors. It
merely indicates to the post-processing team that the vertical range to target or the lateral offset has exceeded pre-defined limits. The post-processing engineers can use
this flag to help them analyse the acquired data more easily.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 31 of 32
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 32 of 32
7 – Operating Procedure
7 OPERATING PROCEDURE
In common with other items of precision equipment, you may rely on the quality of
data gathered by the 350 System only if you follow the correct operating procedures
when you use it.
This section of the Manual considers the role that the 350 System plays within an
overall survey operation. The sub-sections follow a typical survey operation in
sequence: It begins with the preparation necessary before the survey, includes some
operational considerations, and ends with some suggestions for the effective use of
the quality control information.
This is an important section of the 350 Manual and contains information to help you
complete a survey operation successfully. However, you should always follow specific
advice and instructions provided by the survey planning team if these conflict with the
suggestions in this Manual.
If necessary, contact TSS for advice on operational and technical issues concerning
the 350 System. The title page of this Manual lists the contact details for TSS (International) Ltd. The DeepView Help system also lists the contact details of TSS offices in
Aberdeen and Houston.
7.1 Before the Survey
Page 2
Details that must be considered during the period leading up to a survey. This subsection will be of particular interest to Survey Planners and their clients.
7.2 During the survey
Page 4
The correct operating procedure for the 350 System during a survey. The level of
System-specific information included in this sub-section will be useful to engineers
directly involved with the survey operation.
7.4 After the Survey
Page 19
To maintain the 350 System in good working order it is important to perform these
simple tasks after you complete the survey and recover the ROV.
To allow for meaningful analysis of the acquired data, the 350 System allows you to
keep a record of the System configuration during a survey. The operating software
DeepView generates this information and makes it available for editing and printing
through the Windows™ Notepad application.
7.5 Operational Considerations
Page 20
Some potential sources of error that you might encounter during a survey and some
suggestions for avoiding them.
7.6 ROVs
Page 29
The 350 System is suitable for installation and use on board a wide range of ROV
types.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
7.1 BEFORE THE SURVEY
You should include the following considerations in the survey planning scheme:
1. Personnel and equipment availability.
Check the availability of a working 350 System and a TSS-trained operator for the
period of the survey. Refer to sub-section 7.1.1.
2. Tone frequency.
Choose a frequency for the tone, taking into account details such as the length of
the cable and the noise levels in the received bandwidth of the 350 System. Refer
to sub-section 7.1.2.
3. Survey requirements.
Define the type of survey and consider the possible compromise between acceptable measurement accuracy and the time it takes to complete the survey. Refer to
sub-section 7.1.3.
4. Installation requirements. Refer to sub-section 7.1.4
Contact TSS for advice if necessary. You will find the contact details for TSS (International) Ltd on the title page of this Manual.
7.1.1 Personnel and Equipment Availability
When used properly, the TSS 350 System is a precision survey tool that provides valuable and detailed survey data to describe the track of a conductive target through
the survey area.
It is in the interest of the Survey Planners to ensure that appropriate personnel attend
one of the TSS Training Courses. Two levels of 350 Training Course are available.
Refer to Appendix B.2 for a description of each course.
Ensure that a 350 System in good working order and with a complete kit of spare
parts will be available at the time of the survey operation.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
7.1.2 Tone Frequency
Your choice of tone frequency that you inject onto the target cable should take
account of several factors, including:
❐
Specific requirements of the survey planning team.
❐
The length of the target cable.
The distributed capacitance between the cable and sea water attenuates high
tone frequencies more rapidly than low tone frequencies. For this reason, surveys
on long cables might be easier to conduct if you select a frequency near the lower
end of the acceptable range. However, the 350 System is more sensitive to high
frequencies than low, and the System can therefore detect the cable at a greater
range when you select a high frequency tone.
❐
Noise in the survey area.
High levels of background noise will reduce the ability of the 350 System to calculate the target co-ordinates accurately, particularly when the tone exists at a low
amplitude. Use the Scope and Spectrum Analyser window of DeepView to find a
relatively quiet part of the band and try to set a tone frequency within that region of
the band.
Refer to Appendix C.1 for further relevant details.
7.1.3 Survey Requirements
During the early stages, the survey planning team will need to define the type of data
required from the survey:
❐
The 350 System can complete a quick and simple check on the track and depth of
cover of a target by making a series of widely spaced measurements.
❐
Alternatively, to work to the highest achievable accuracy, you might need to stop
the ROV at carefully specified intervals to perform accurate measurements on the
target and to measure the mean seabed level with a separate profiling system.
The 350 System always delivers measurements of the highest achievable accuracy
under the given conditions. The compromise that you need to make between survey
accuracy and operating speed arises from the need to manoeuvre and measure the
position of the ROV with greater precision when you demand a sharper survey resolution.
7.1.4 Installation Requirements
Before starting a survey the survey planning team should define the installation
requirements of the 350 System. They should consider:
❐
The type of ROV to be used and where the SEP and the coils will be mounted.
The 350 System is suitable for use on most types of ROV, including towed sleds.
TSS can offer further advice if necessary.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
❐
Which communication method to use between the SEP and the SDC. This will
depend upon the characteristics of the umbilical cable. See Section 4 for guidance.
❐
Whether to use an altimeter or a rapid update profiler, and their location on the
ROV.
❐
The type and capacity of data logger, and its connection and communication
requirements. Check that the data logger will be compatible with the data format
supplied by the 350 System.
❐
TSS recommends that you should generate a written or printed copy of the System configuration before and again after the survey. This will be useful source of
reference during the data analysis phase of the survey. This recommendation
means you should arrange to connect a suitable printer to the SDC LPT1 port.
❐
The on board facilities for creating, displaying and recording video images from a
sub-sea camera mounted on the ROV. Consider using the video facilities to
record the installation procedure of the 350 System.
The standard 350 System includes a field support kit (FSK) for use with the sub-sea
installation. Only engineers who have attended Part 2 of the relevant TSS training
course should use the FSK.
7.2 DURING THE SURVEY
This sub-section lists and explains a basic series of suggested operations and procedures to include in a survey that uses the 350 System. However, you should always follow the specific requirements of the survey planning team, who may require you to
modify or add to these procedures. Contact TSS for advice if necessary.
The DeepView Run Window, described in sub-section 6.2.1.2, provides access to all
the facilities you will need during a survey that involves the 350 System. By referring
to this window and other features of DeepView, perform the survey:
1. Safety and pre-dive checks.
Make a series of checks on the installation before you deploy the ROV. See subsection 7.2.1.
2. Print the System configuration details.
Select File➥Print Configuration in the DeepView toolbar to send a copy of the 350
System details to the Windows™ Notepad application. You should print the details
from this application and save the printed copy with the survey records.
3. Deploy the ROV.
Begin the survey with the ROV close to the expected target position.
4. Check signals from the SEP.
Use the Scope and Spectrum Analyser window again to confirm that the SEP is
receiving signals (tone, mains frequency, harmonics and noise) on all channels.
Check for valid signals from the sub-sea altimeter.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
5. Manoeuvre the ROV over the target.
Use the forward search feature of DeepView to locate a target that crosses the
path of the ROV and then use the signal strength bars and the Run Window to
steer along its course.
Figure 7–1: Using the forward search mode
6. Perform the main survey:
❐ Log all survey data. The main function of the 350 System is to acquire and log survey data for subsequent analysis. DeepView can log data both internally, on the
SDC hard disk, and externally to a data logger. You should use the external data
logging facility to store the primary survey log. See sub-section 7.2.2.
❐
Perform regular checks on the signal received at the tone frequency. Take any
action necessary to restore deteriorating performance.
❐
Operate the ROV and the 350 System so as to control those factors that might
degrade the survey results. Refer to sub-section 7.3 for some important operational considerations.
7. On completing the survey.
Perform a series of simple procedures to safeguard the logged data and maintain
the 350 System in good condition ready for the next survey. Refer to sub-section
7.4.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
7.2.1 Safety and Pre-dive checks
This section describes a series of checks that you should perform on the 350 System
before you deploy the ROV and start the survey. Perform these checks carefully, noting any safety issues as you do so:
❐
Check the installation of the coil array (section 3.2.2). Ensure that the coil connectors will not be fouled by any manipulators etc., or damaged as the ROV is recovered. Ensure the coil separation distance has been measured correctly, and
entered into the top end display software (section 6.1.1.3).
❐
Check that all cables are undamaged and secured.
❐
Ensure the survey will not exceed the depth rating of the SEP. Most systems are
rated to 3000m, but check the warning on Page 3.
❐
Ensure all subsea connectors are mated correctly (section 4.1.2) and that blanking plugs are fitted to any unused ports.
❐
Check that DeepView has been configured with the coil calibration constants correctly (section 6.2.2)
To check the operation of the system:
❐
Use the frequency spectrum display of the 350 System (see sub-section 6.2.1.4)
and check that the SDC receives signals correctly on all channels. Repeat this test
with the ROV in the water.
❐
Perform an altimeter test (sub-section 6.2.2.1) and check that the SEP or SDC
receives data packets correctly from the altimeter. Repeat the test in water.
CAUTIONS
Make certain the SDC and its connection cables are secured so that they cannot fall or
present a hazard to personnel.
Allow only properly qualified engineers to work on the 350 System.
The supply connector is a safety feature that allows the system to be isolated easily
from the electrical supply. Hand tighten the connector only. Position the connector to
allow easy access for disconnection.
Ensure there are proper blanking plugs fitted to any unused ports on the SEP.
Details of the pre-dive checks are also available in the DeepView on-line help system.
7.2.2 Data Logging
To provide the post-processing engineers with a detailed account of the survey it is
important to maintain a full log of events as they occur during a survey.
The survey log should therefore include:
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
❐
The data logged to an external logger
❐
The video recording of the 350 System installation and configuration procedures
(if one has been made)
❐
The video recordings from cameras on board the ROV
❐
Details of any events, such as ROV collisions, that may have occurred during the
survey, and the effect that they may have had upon the survey. You should also
record any corrective action taken.
❐
Printed or hand-written sheets containing the System configuration details that
were taken at the start and at the end of the survey
❐
Any other information requested by the survey planning team
7.2.3 Replay Logged Data
You cannot use the display software on the SDC to replay externally logged files.
To replay a previously logged data file you have to select Open/Close Replay file [F2]
from the file option from within DeepView for Windows. This will provide you with the
following dialog box to select the file you require. The location of these files by default
is a Logs folder within the DeepView for Windows directory, but this can be changed
by the user to another directory, or to a floppy disk in drive A of the SDC.
❐
Externally logged data files include data packets of fixed length that supply all the
information required for a full analysis of the survey. The file includes target coordinates, signal values and important quality control information generated by the
350 System during the survey. You should use this logging method to generate
the primary survey recording.
Externally logged files will usually be stored on a separate data logger along with
files generated by other items of survey equipment. The data logger will time
stamp data packets that it receives so that the records may be synchronised accurately during the analysis operation. For this reason, DeepView does not include a
time field in the external data packets. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2.2 for a description of the external logging format.
❐
Internally logged files are of variable length and include all data transmitted to the
SDC by the SEP (target co-ordinates, signal values and, possibly, information
needed by the Scope and Spectrum Analyser window). The data packets also
include comment lines that describe the SEP type and other System information,
a time stamp and any text annotations supplied by the user. The internal logging
format does NOT include the quality control information.
Refer to sub-section 7.3.2 for a description of the internal logging format.
The internal logging facility is for test purposes and for the convenience of operators
only. You should not use it to record the main survey log.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
External logging and internal logging use different data formats that are not compatible
with each other. You cannot use the SDC to ‘replay’ an externally logged file.
DeepView for Windows allows you to configure an SDC serial port for communication
with the external data logger. This option is covered in Section 6.2.2.2. Refer to the
technical manual of your data logger for the correct communication parameters.
7.3 DATA FORMATS
This section describes both the external format and the sentences used internally.
7.3.1 External Logging Format
The output from the SDC to a data logger includes a Quality Control flag and identification codes generated by the 350 System. Post-processing engineers can use this
additional information to modify the plot of the target profile to identify areas where
the flag is set.
This simple facility allows a rapid visual analysis of the information, and quickly shows
any areas where the engineers should examine the data more closely.
The quality control flag does NOT mean that the measurements contain errors. It
merely indicates to the post-processing team that the vertical range to target or the lateral offset has exceeded pre-defined limits. The post-processing engineers can use
this flag to help them analyse the acquired data more easily.
7.3.1.1 Co-ordinates and Signals Format
In survey mode, the following sentence is transmitted.
Carriage return line-feed termination
Space character
QC check code (Note 10)
Signal strength on channel 6 (Note 9)
Space character
Signal strength on channel 5 (Note 9)
Space character
Signal strength on channel 4 (Note 9)
Space character
Signal strength on channel 3 (Note 9)
Space character
Signal strength on channel 2 (Note 9)
Space character
Signal strength on channel 1 (Note 9)
Space character
Skew angle (Note 8)
Target depth of cover (Note 7)
Coil altitude (Note 6)
Space character
Vertical range to target (Note 5)
Space character
Lateral offset (Note 4)
Start character (Note 1)
Packet identifier (Note 2)
QC flag (Note 3)
Table 7–1: External Output format - Survey Mode
:SQ±LLLL VVVV AAAA±CCCC±SSS 1111 2222 3333 4444 5555 6666 QQ[CR][LF]
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon – ASCII 3Ah.
2. ‘S’ (ASCII 60h) identifies survey mode packet.
3. The Quality Control (QC) flag will be a space character when RESET, or a question mark (? – ASCII 3Fh) if set. See also the QC code later in this packet.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
4. The lateral offset (LAT) is measured from the centre of the coil array. Positive values indicate a target to starboard of the centre line. The field will contain question
marks if the target is out of range.
5. The vertical range to target (VRT) is the distance between the centre line of the
coil array and the target. There are several conditions that will cause the field to
contain question marks:
❐The
target is out of range
❐The
350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
❐Coil
saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong.
6. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one.
Otherwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. The
field will contain question marks if there is no fixed height or altimeter information
available.
7. The SDC calculates the target depth of cover (COV) using COV = VRT – ALT. A
positive value indicates the target is covered. Zero or negative values indicate an
exposed target. There are several conditions that will cause the field to contain
question marks:
❐The
target is out of range
❐The
350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
❐Coil
saturation has occurred
❐There
is no fixed coil height or information available to the SDC from an altimeter
8. The skew angle in the range -90 to +90 degrees. This field will contain question
marks if the System cannot measure skew angle. Zero skew is the ideal situation
where the ROV aligns on the same heading as the direction of the target. Skew is
positive when ROV heading is to starboard of the target direction.
9. The signal strengths, in microvolts, measured on channel 1 (starboard lateral –
SL), channel 2 (starboard vertical – SV), channel 3 (port lateral – PL), channel 4
(port vertical – PV), channel 5 (starboard fore-aft – SF) and channel 6 (port foreaft – PF).
Information included in the above signal strength fields may have a very large
dynamic range, extending from less than 1µV to more than 7 volts. To allow for
simple encoding of this range, the System displays and logs values using scientific notation:
The signal value format is: abbc where the actual value is a.bb e+c µV
For example:
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
❐
❐
10.
The field +1234 represents a value of 1.23 × 104 microvolts (or 12.3 mV). The
SDC would display this on the Run Display screen as +1.23e4 in the lower
left-hand data panel.
The field +2416 represents a value 2.41 × 106 microvolts (or 2.41 volts). The
SDC would display this on the Run Display screen as +2.41e6 in the lower
left-hand data panel.
The QC check code provides additional status information that explains any
occurrence of the QC flag being set. The check code consists of a two-digit
number in the range 01 to 07 and 99 with the meanings defined in Table 7–2.
Table 7–2: QC check code meaning – Survey mode
QC Check
Code
Meaning
00
Target in range. SL and PL ≥50µV; LAT ≤±2m. Quality flag is RESET.
01
Target in range. SL or PL <50µV; LAT ≤±2m. Quality flag is SET.
02
Target in range. SL or PL ≥50µV; LAT >±2m. Quality flag is SET.
03
Target in range. SL or PL <50µV; LAT >±2m. Quality flag is SET.
04
Starboard tracking data only; LAT = ????, VRT = ????, SKEW = ???. Quality flag is SET.
05
Port tracking data only; LAT = –????, VRT = ????, SKEW = ???. Quality flag is SET.
06
Skew angle not available. Skew angle = ???. Quality flag is SET.
07
Saturation in one or more coils. Quality flag is SET. The SDC displays a warning banner on the Run Display screen.
99
Target out of range. VRT and LAT = ????. SKEW = ???. Quality flag is SET.
7.3.1.2 Forward Search mode
The string is 48 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC
logs all distances in units of centimetres and signal voltages in units of microvolts
using the scientific notation. The values in the packet are rounded and it is possible
that they will not precisely match those on the Forward Search screen.
Table 7–3: External logging format – Forward search mode
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. ‘F’ identifies a packet from the Forward search mode. The SDC transmits this type
of packet whenever it is displaying the Forward Search screen.
3. The Quality Control (QC) flag will be a space character when RESET, or a question mark (?) when SET. See also the QC check code later in this packet.
4. The forward search range (FWD) is measured from the reference line of the coil
array (identified in Figure 3–2). There are several conditions that will cause the
field to contain question marks:
❐The
target is out of range
❐The
350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
❐Coil
saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong
5. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one.
Otherwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. Forward search mode is available only if information is available concerning the
height of the coils above the seabed, and so this field will always contain information.
6. The signal strengths, in microvolts, measured on channel 1 (starboard lateral –
SL), channel 2 (starboard vertical – SV), channel 3 (port lateral – PL), channel 4
(port vertical – PV), channel 5 (starboard fore-aft – SF) and channel 6 (port foreaft – PF).
Information included in the above signal strength fields may have a very large
dynamic range, extending from less than 1µV to more than 7 volts. To allow for
simple encoding of this range, the System displays and logs values using the scientific notation explained on page 9.
7. The QC check code provides additional status information that explains any
occurrence of the QC flag being set. The check code consists of a two-digit
number with the meanings defined in Table 7–4.
Table 7–4: QC check code meaning – Forward search mode
QC Check
Code
Meaning
00
Target in range. SF and PF ≥50µV; LAT ≤±2m. Quality flag is RESET.
07
Saturation in one or more coils. Quality flag is SET.
08
Target in range. SF or PF <50µV. Quality flag is SET.
99
Target out of range. FWD = 9999. Quality flag is SET.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
7.3.2 Internal Logging Format
Data packets transmitted by the SEP fall into two categories – ‘co-ordinates’ and ‘signals’. The SEP transmits them sequentially so that either packet ‘A1’ or ‘A2’ below
immediately precedes packet ‘B’.
A1) Co-ordinates Data Packet – Survey mode
The string is 23 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC
logs all distances in units of centimetres and skew angles in units of degrees. The values in the packet are rounded and it is possible that they will not precisely match
those on the Run Display screen.
Table 7–5: Internal logging format – Survey co-ordinates
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. The number of coils in the 350 System is always 6.
3. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one.
Otherwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. If
there is no altitude information available the field will contain three space characters and a zero.
4. The lateral offset (LAT) is measured from the centre of the coil array. Positive values indicate a target to starboard of the centre line. The field will contain question
marks if the target is out of range.
5. The vertical range to target (VRT) is the distance between the reference line of the
coil array (identified in Figure 3–2) and the target. The value is always positive.
There are several conditions that will cause the field to contain question marks:
❐The
target is out of range
❐The
350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
❐Coil
saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
6. Skew angle between the target and the ROV in the range –90° to +90°. Zero skew
is the ideal situation where the ROV aligns on the same heading as the direction
of the target. Skew is positive when the ROV heading is to starboard of the target
direction. The field will contain question marks if the 350 System cannot measure
the skew angle.
A2) Co-ordinates Data Packet – Forward Search mode
The string is 23 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC
logs all distances in units of centimetres and skew angles in units of degrees. The values in the packet are rounded and it is possible that they will not precisely match
those on the Forward Search screen.
Table 7–6: Internal logging format – Forward search mode
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. The number of coils in the 350 System is always 6.
3. Coil altitude (ALT) information comes from an altimeter if the System includes one.
Otherwise, the information in this field will be the fixed coil height if available. Forward search mode works only if information is available concerning the height of
the coils above the seabed, and so this field will always contain information.
4. The forward search range to the target (FWD) is the estimated distance from the
coil array to the target. There are several conditions that will cause the field to contain question marks:
❐The
target is out of range
❐The
350 System cannot compute an accurate position for the target
❐Coil
saturation has occurred because the tone signal is too strong
5. Skew angle between the target and the ROV in the range –90° to +90°. Zero skew
is the ideal situation where the ROV aligns on the same heading as the direction
of the target. Skew is positive when the ROV heading is to starboard of the target
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
direction. The field will contain question marks if the 350 System cannot measure
the skew angle.
B) Signals Data Packet (both operating modes)
The string is 34 characters long with individual field definitions as follows. The SDC
logs all signal voltages in units of microvolts.
Table 7–7: Internal logging format – Signals packet
Notes:
1. The Start character is a colon.
2. The signal strengths, in microvolts, measured on channel 1 (starboard lateral –
SL), channel 2 (starboard vertical – SV), channel 3 (port lateral – PL), channel 4
(port vertical – PV), channel 5 (starboard fore-aft – SF) and channel 6 (port foreaft – PF).
Information included in the above signal strength fields may have a very large
dynamic range, extending from less than 1µV to more than 7 volts. To allow for
simple encoding of this range, the System displays and logs values using the scientific notation explained on page 9.
Each time the SEP receives a single carriage-return line-feed sequence from the
SDC, it transmits either packet ‘A1’ or packet ‘A2’, followed immediately by packet
‘B’.
7.3.3 Altimeter Data Format
You may use certain types of altimeter manufactured by Datasonics, Ulvertech, Simrad and OSEL with the 350 System.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.5 for instructions to connect one of these alternative types of
altimeter to the SDC. You may connect the Datasonics unit either to the SDC ‘ALTIMETER’ COM2 port or directly to the SEP ‘Altimeter’ port.
You must configure the display software to use your altimeter type. Refer to the
instructions in sub-section 6.2.2.1 for instructions to do this.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 14 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
The descriptions below include the individual data formats and the RS232 parameters
for each type of altimeter that you may use with the 350 System. Except for the OSEL
altimeter, transmission starts immediately after power-on.
Note that DeepView removes all spaces present in the altimeter string before interpretation. This is because the UK90 format sometimes includes extra spaces which
are not defined in its specification. This removal of spaces applies to all types of altimeters which are connected directly to the SDC.
7.3.3.1 Datasonics PSA 900 and PSA 9000
The transmission formats for the TSS altimeter, and the Datasonics PSA 900 and
PSA 9000 are identical. They transmit data at 2400 baud using 7 data bits, 1 start bit,
1 mark bit and 1 stop bit.
Table 7–8: Altimeter output format – TSS and Datasonics
If the Datasonics PSA 900 includes the optional pressure transducer, the data string
becomes:
Table 7–9: Altimeter output format – Datasonics with pressure transducer
7.3.3.2 Ulvertech Bathymetric System
The Ulvertech Bathymetric system transmits data at 9600 baud using 8 data bits, 1
stop bit and no parity.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 15 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
Table 7–10: Altimeter output format – Ulvertech Bathymetric system
7.3.3.3 Simrad UK90
The Simrad UK90 transmits data at 4800 baud using 8 data bits, 2 stop bits and no
parity.
Table 7–11: Altimeter output format – Simrad UK90
Notes:
1. The Simrad UK90 altimeter measures altitude at twice the rate that it measures
depth. It therefore includes the altitude field twice in each data packet, separated
by a space character. Both altitude fields will contain similar values because it is
unlikely the altitude will change significantly during the short interval between the
two measurements.
2. The contents of these output data fields are set externally and have no effect on
operation of the 350 System.
7.3.3.4 OSEL Bathymetric System
The OSEL Bathymetric system transmits data at 9600 baud using 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit and no parity.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 16 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
Table 7–12: Altimeter output format – OSEL bathymetric system
The OSEL altimeter must receive the interrogating character uppercase ‘D’ from the
SDC before it transmits each data string. The communication link between the OSEL
altimeter and the SDC must therefore be bi-directional. The SDC transmits the interrogating character automatically when configured to use the OSEL altimeter.
7.3.3.5 Tritech SeaKing Bathy 704
The SeaKing Bathy system transmits data continuously using RS232 communications at 9600 baud.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 17 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
Table 7–13: Tritech SeaKing Bathy format
Notes:
1. The SDC performs the following calculation to calculate the altitude above the
seabed:
Altitude = ((Altimeter reading × 200ns) × velocity of sound) ÷ 2
For example, if the count were 162712, then:
Altitude = ((162712 × 200ns) × 1475) ÷ 2 = 24.000 metres
This is the true distance from the transducer face of the altimeter to the seabed.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 18 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
7.4 AFTER THE SURVEY
To maintain the 350 System in good condition you should perform the following
important tasks after you complete the survey and recover the ROV:
❐
Print the System configuration details again. Select File➥Print Configuration in the
DeepView toolbar to send a copy of the 350 System details to the Windows™
Notepad application. Save the printed copy with the survey records.
❐
Recover the ROV.
❐
Close the internal and external log files and create backup copies of them. Include
a copy of the external log file with the survey records.
❐
Power-off the 350 System.
❐
Use a fresh water hose to wash salt and debris off the ROV-mounted components
of the 350 System. Inspect all components, cables and connectors of the installation carefully and make any repairs necessary.
❐
Check the contents of the field support kit and order any parts needed to replenish
it.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 19 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
7.5 OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
7.5.1 Operating Performance
Together with the skilful operation of the 350 System, two major factors influence the
response and the performance of the System during survey operations:
1. Frequency of the target tone
You may minimise the effects of background noise by selecting a tone that is in a relatively quiet part of the received band of frequencies. The Scope and Spectrum Analyser window of DeepView helps you make this selection. Refer to sub-section 6.2.1.4
for a description of this window.
2. Coil arrangement on the ROV
The performance of the 350 System depends heavily on the mounting arrangements
of the coil array. You need to consider two factors carefully when you use the System:
❐
Because the 350 System uses trigonometry to determine the target co-ordinates,
the accuracy of its survey measurements will improve with larger coil separation
distances. However, by installing the coil triads farther apart you might find it difficult to manoeuvre the ROV.
❐
Large masses of ferromagnetic material can distort the magnetic fields that the
350 System uses to survey the target. There is usually an abundance of such
materials in the ROV body.
You should install the coil array where it is at least 0.5 metres away from the ROV
body. The installation instructions provided in this Manual describe a configuration
of the 350 System that combines ease of deployment with optimal performance.
Summary:
The logged data packets include a Quality Control flag to identify data that might
show degraded accuracy. Refer to sub-section 7.3.1 for a description of the Quality
Control feature.
Use all the information and facilities available from the 350 System to identify any
drop in System performance so that you may take effective and appropriate corrective action.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 20 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
7.5.2 Sources of Error
There are other error sources that might degrade System performance. You should
make yourself aware of these so that you may take action to avoid them or to reduce
their effect on survey results.
These error sources fall within two categories:
❐
ROV handling – See sub-section 7.5.2.1.
❐
Electrical interference – See sub-section 7.5.2.2.
7.5.2.1 ROV Handling
The following paragraphs describe the potential sources of error that might arise as a
result of unskilled or inappropriate operation of the ROV. These include:
❐
The relative positions of the ROV and the target.
❐
ROV trim and skew.
❐
The position of the altimeter.
ROV Position over the Target
Figure 7–2 illustrates how errors in the measurement of depth of cover might occur
when you survey a target that is partially buried beneath an uneven seabed.
Note that errors such as these arise from inaccuracies in measurements made by the
altimeter and not to any errors in measuring the vertical range to target.
Figure 7–2: ROV positioning errors
❐
Flying with no lateral offset
Figure 7–2(a) shows the best condition achievable when you use a single altimeter: The ROV is level and is flying with the altimeter located directly over the target.
Under these conditions the depth of cover measurements are accurate.
❐
Flying with Lateral Offset
In Figure 7–2(b), the lateral offset of the ROV has placed the altimeter to one side
of the target so that it measures its altitude above one of the trench walls. Conse-
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 21 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
quently, the altimeter delivers information that will not allow accurate assessment
of the depth of target cover.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 22 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
It is therefore important to ensure that:
❐
You install the altimeter correctly according to the instructions in sub-section 3.2.3.
❐
You locate the altimeter near the centre of the coil array.
❐
You operate the ROV so that, as far as possible, the target remains positioned
centrally beneath the coil array.
It is important also to recognise that, under the above conditions, these errors affect
only the depth of cover measurements.
Summary:
Install the altimeter correctly at the centre of the coil array.
Pay careful attention to the relative position of the ROV over the target.
Be aware of any errors that may arise from the local seabed topography.
For surveys where the depth-of-cover information is critical, consider using a scanning profiler to survey the seabed on either side of the target. You may then merge
information from the profiler with measurements from the 350 System during the survey analysis operation.
The effects of roll, pitch and skew
In severe cases of roll such as shown in Figure 7–3, errors might appear in the vertical range and lateral offset measurements on the target.
Figure 7–3: ROV roll errors
Figure 7–3(a) shows the ideal condition where the ROV is level over the target. In
these conditions, the measurements for VRT and LAT will be accurate and valid.
Figure 7–3(b) shows the same situation, but with 15° roll applied to the ROV. If left
uncorrected, under these conditions errors will exist in the measurements of both the
vertical range and the lateral offset.
For a target located centrally beneath the coil array as shown, the displayed value for
lateral offset will contain an error as follows:
Error = Z.sin (Roll angle)
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 23 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
Where Z is the vertical distance between the coils and the target.
For example, measurements on a target located 1.0 metre below the centre of the coil
array will include a lateral offset error of 0.17 metres with 10° of roll applied to the
ROV.
Measurements of VRT performed by the 350 System will remain relatively unaffected
by small angles of roll. Under the conditions described in the above example, the vertical measurement will contain an error of only 15mm caused by the ROV attitude.
If left uncorrected, angles of pitch will affect:
❐
The accuracy of the forward range estimate.
❐
The depth-of-cover measurement accuracy.
The accuracy of vertical range measurements might degrade if large angles of skew
exist between the coil array and the target. This is because the effective coil separation distance decreases as the angle opens.
If there is a slight crosscurrent in the survey area, it may be possible to perform the
survey only with a small angle of skew present. Under these circumstances, the System will continue to supply valid data with skew angles up to ±15°. If you know that
this condition will prevail in the survey area, assess the degree of error by conducting
dry-land test measurements on a sample of the target with applied skew.
The Run Window of DeepView displays the measured angle of skew between the
ROV and the target when operating in the 350 mode.
Summary:
Inaccuracies in vertical range measurements made by the System will increase by no
more than 3.5% for roll angles up to ±15°.
Where possible, operate the ROV throughout a survey with an even trim and with no
angle of skew between the ROV and the target.
Slope
When you use the 350 System to survey a cable that ascends or descends a steep
slope, you should understand how measurements of depth of cover may degrade in
accuracy. Figure 7–4 illustrates this situation.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 24 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
Figure 7–4: Sloping target
In Figure 7–4 the coil array G measures the shortest distance to the target I.
Similarly, the measurements of ALT will be the shortest distance between the altimeter and the seabed within the beamwidth of the altimeter H.
The depth of cover COV = VRT – ALT. However, because the seabed is sloping, the
measurements of VRT and ALT are valid for different locations on the seabed.
Because of this, errors will appear in the depth-of-cover measurements. Errors of this
type will be larger if the altimeter and the coil array are at opposite ends of the ROV.
Since the slope of the seabed will vary unpredictably, there might be some random
elements of error in all these measurements.
Summary:
Be aware of the potential measurement errors that might appear when operating over
a sloping target.
Make certain there is a negligible fore-aft offset distance between the coil array and
the transducer face of the altimeter. Angles of slope less than half the beamwidth of
the altimeter will not affect the measurements in this way.
Reduce the potential errors caused by a sloping seabed by operating the ROV as
close as possible to the seabed.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 25 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
7.5.2.2 Electrical Interference
The 350 System is unaffected by the following factors:
❐
Changes of ROV heading
❐
Any local static magnetic field
❐
Acoustic noise
❐
The presence of platforms, rigs or other vessels in the vicinity.
This sub-section describes the sources of interference that might affect the 350 System.
You may estimate the level of background noise by examining the Scope and Spectrum Analyser window of DeepView. If the noise level is so high so that it masks the
tone frequency, take whatever action you can to reduce or eliminate the noise.
The ROV
Other items of electrical equipment on board the ROV, for example the thrusters,
might represent a powerful source of electrical noise. If these noise components are
at a sufficiently high level, they might mask the relatively weak signals associated with
the target tone.
Signal discrimination by the 350 System is extremely good. It removes noise from the
calculation process by examining only a very narrow window of frequencies with the
tone at its centre. However, where noise levels centred on the tone frequency are
very high, they might degrade the performance of the 350 System and affect the
accuracy of its survey measurements.
The Scope and Spectrum Analyser window of DeepView will show those bands
where noise is at a minimum. You may then adjust the frequency of the target tone to
fall within one of these quieter bands.
Summary:
Use the SDC display software to check all channels of the 350 System with all electrical equipment on the ROV operating. Select a tone frequency centred on a part of the
band that has low noise levels.
Investigate any severe noise sources before you start the survey and reduce or eliminate them if possible.
Use the display software to perform regular checks on the quality of tone signal.
Vibration
Mechanical vibration of the coil triads could create a noise signal at a relatively low
level as the coils move relative to local magnetic fields. This noise would exist across
a broad band of frequencies centred on the frequency of vibration.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 26 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
Where vibration is fast and severe, the resultant induced signals could interfere with
the signal from the target cable.
Slow movements, such as those of the ROV manoeuvring, will have a negligible
effect since the resulting induced voltages will be at a frequency below the pass-band
of the 350 System.
Summary:
Follow the installation instructions throughout this Manual. Ensure the coil mounting
arrangements provide a rigid support that damps vibrations quickly.
Operate the ROV at a speed that avoids the onset of vibration.
Select a tone frequency that does not coincide with the frequency of vibration.
Power-carrying Cables
If you use the 350 System to survey power cables that carry high currents, the coils
might experience saturation. If this occurs, the System will be unable to calculate the
position of the target.
The most effective way to cure this problem is to remove power from the cable or to
operate the ROV at a greater distance from the target.
Impressed-current Cathodic Protection
When surveying near sub-sea pipes or metallic structures that use impressed-current
cathodic protection, the 350 System might suffer from noise pick-up. Provided the
tone frequency is different from that of the cathodic protection the System will be able
to discriminate between the two.
Use the display software to confirm whether such noise breakthrough is occurring.
Summary:
Perform regular checks on signal quality and on the signal-to-noise ratio by using the
SDC display software.
If cathodic protection currents present a problem, arrange to switch off the current
while you perform the target survey. The interference will disappear immediately
although the protection afforded by the current will remain for some time afterwards.
Operating over Ferrous Rock Dumps
Operating the 350 System over a ferrous rock deposit or dump might affect measurements. This is because the ferrous content of the rock will introduce a random distortion to the magnetic fields radiated by the tone-carrying cable.
This distortion varies with the nature of the rock and there is no way to predict the
magnitude of errors introduced.
Summary:
Where possible avoid conducting a survey in areas where the rock formations have a
significant ferrous content.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 27 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
Be aware of a possible degradation in measurement accuracy when operating the
350 System near ferrous rock dumps.
Earth Return Path
If the tone-carrying cable runs parallel with and close to a good conductor, this
arrangement might introduce a shorter earth return path for the tone current. In very
severe cases, the shorter return path might cause errors to appear in measurements
made by the 350 System.
In these conditions, the characteristics of the return path are uncertain, making it
impossible to predict the magnitude of errors.
Summary:
Be aware that errors might exist in data acquired by the 350 System when you operate it over saturated sand or where a nearby conductive structure, such as a pipeline,
runs alongside the cable.
Curved Target Course
If the target cable has been laid along a course that includes loops or curves as
shown in Figure 7–5, the magnetic fields radiated by the tone will be distorted unpredictably throughout the affected areas.
Under these conditions, the measurement accuracy of the 350 System will degrade
unpredictably.
Figure 7–5: Curved target
Summary:
Be aware that errors might exist in data acquired by the 350 System when you use it
to survey targets that do not follow an approximately straight course.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 28 of 30
7 – Operating Procedure
7.6 ROVS
You may use the 350 System with most types and size of ROV, and you may operate
it at depths down to its maximum specified depth rating. The standard installation
described in this Manual provides a high degree of accuracy and a useful measurement range, together with ease of deployment.
It is important to install the 350 System properly by following the instructions included
throughout this Manual. The System will supply valid survey data only if you follow
these installation and operating instructions, which allow you to install the System on
most types of ROV.
7.6.1 Speed of Operation
The 350 System delivers measurements to a data logger continuously at a rate that
allows deployment on the faster ROVs. This is sufficient to maintain a high track resolution under all normal operating conditions.
7.6.2 Altitude above the Seabed
The vertical detection range of the 350 System is limited by the frequency and magnitude of the target tone.
Where you will use the System to track a weak current at low frequency you should fly
the ROV as near to the seabed as possible, while avoiding damage, so that the coils
remain close to the target. If your ROV has an automatic facility for maintaining altitude, you may use it.
7.6.3 Tracked ROV
You may install the 350 System on tracked ROVs. This type of ROV should allow you
to set a fixed coil height.
If you mount the System on an ROV of this type, locate the coils approximately one
metre above the seabed.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 29 of 30
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 30 of 30
8 – System Specifications
8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Along with a detailed specification of the 350 System and its major assemblies, this
section of the Manual also includes a chart to show the measurement accuracy that
the System can deliver under ideal operating conditions.
While revising this 350 System Manual, TSS has made every effort to ensure that the
specifications included are correct.
However, in line with the TSS policy of continual product development and improvement, TSS (International) Ltd reserves the right to change equipment specifications
without notice. Refer to TSS for advice if necessary.
8.1 Specifications
Page 2
Detailed hardware specifications for the major components of the 350 System.
8.2 Performance
Page 5
A graphical illustration of the range performance envelope of the 350 System for one
particular combination of tone frequency and current.
8.3 System Trials
Page 6
Details and results of trials conducted using the 350 System to investigate and confirm the accuracy of measurement.
8.4 Update Rate
Page 9
You must take care when you merge data supplied by the 350 System with information from other sources.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
8.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Where given, UK imperial conversions of dimensions and weights are to two decimal
place accuracy.
8.1.1 Surface Display Computer
SDC-Type 9:
To take advantage of developments in computer technology, TSS (International) Ltd
has updated the design of the SDC since the first introduction of the original 350 Cable
Survey System. The software used by the 350 System is the first in the series to operate in the Windows 2000 environment, therefore earlier SDCs will not have the capability to operate this system correctly.
Processor:
VIA Nehemiah 1GHz processor running Windows 2000
RAM size:
96 MB
Hard disk size:
Minimum 40 GB
CD-RW Drive:
x52 speed CD-RW drive
Ports:
Four serial RS232
One parallel LPT1
Colour composite video in/out
S-video in/out
TSS current loop in/out
DVI connector
2 x 15-way VGA connectors.
Keyboard:
1U tray-mounted keyboard/trackpad combination.
Monitor:
Modular 15 inch flat-panel LCD colour display.
Overall size:
555(w) × 280(h) × 550(d) mm (including transit case)
{21.85 × 11.02 × 21.65 inches}
Weight:
Circa. 25kg {51.11 pounds} (including transit case)
Power input voltage:
85 - 265V (47 to 63Hz) auto-ranging
Power consumption:
250W maximum
Temperature range:
(Operating)
Relative humidity:
10% to 95% R.H. non-condensing at 40oC
Vibration resistance:
5 to 17Hz
2.5mm double amplitude displacement.
17 to 500Hz 1.5g peak-to-peak
DPN 402197
0° to 50°C {32°F to 122°F}
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 10
8 – System Specifications
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
8.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
SEP-Type 2:
Size:
Ø140 × 460mm* {Ø5.51 × 18.11 inches}
Weight:
In air
In water
Input voltage:
110 to 120V AC 45 to 65Hz
Maximum power demand 3.1A when in a Dualtrack installation
10kg {22.05 pounds}
2kg {4.41 pounds}
Option – 220 to 240V AC 45 to 65Hz
Maximum power demand 1.8A when in a Dualtrack installation
Operating temperature: 0° to 30°C {32° to 86°F}
Communication:
2-wire 20mA digital current-loop.
4-wire 20mA digital current-loop.
RS232.
Selectable by internal links.
Depth rating:
3000 metres {9843 feet}
Finish:
Hard black anodised aluminium
Connections:
ROV
Umbilical
3 metres cable length
One or two twisted pairs, or multiplexer.
*Allow up to 300mm {11.81 inches} extra for connector clearance.
8.1.3 Search Coil Array
Sensing coil size:
Ø68 × 340mm each {Ø2.68 × 13.39 inches}
Quantity:
Six sensing coils arranged in two coil triads with polyurethane
alignment and mounting blocks.
Weight:
In air
In water
Depth rating:
3000 metres {9843 feet}
Material:
Polyurethane
Connection cables:
Two required – 4 metres long
(8 metre option available).
DPN 402197
3.5kg {7.72 pounds} per sensing coil
2.4kg {5.29 pounds} per sensing coil
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 10
8 – System Specifications
8.2 PERFORMANCE
Figure 8–1 defines the vertical range measurement accuracy of the 350 System for
the stated conditions of tone current – i.e. 30mA at 25Hz.
Figure 8–1: Vertical range measurement accuracy
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
The frequency and amplitude of the tone current may affect the range measurement
capability and noise performance of the 350 System. Changes to the current and frequency will not affect the accuracy of measurements made by the System.
The range information shown in Figure 8–1 applies only where the tone current at the
point of measurement is 30mA at a frequency of 25Hz.
8.3 SYSTEM TRIALS
This sub-section includes the practical results obtained using the 350 System at a
carefully established test site. The trials included measurements over a ±8 metre lateral offset and a vertical range of 5 metres.
8.3.1 Trials Configuration and Procedure
The test site included the largest cable loop that could be laid in the available area
(see Figure 8–2). Equipment for use in the trials procedure included:
❐
A standard TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
❐
A hydraulic platform to support the coils of the 350 System.
❐
A loop of wire 60 metres in diameter as shown in Figure 8–2.
❐
A TSS Tone Generator to supply the cable loop with tone current at various amplitudes and frequencies.
TSS conducted the tests using the central straight run of cable that spanned the
diameter of the loop. This arrangement reduced any effect that the current return path
around the outside of the loop may have had upon readings.
With the hydraulic platform located at the centre of the loop and the coil array positioned centrally over the test cable, the platform could raise and lower the coils to predetermined heights. The test procedure also specified the cable movements necessary to simulate various lateral offsets.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 10
8 – System Specifications
Figure 8–2: Trials site
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
8.3.2 Results
8.3.2.1 Accuracy
Tables 8–1 and 8–2 below show details of the errors measured in the vertical and lateral offsets between the target cable and the centre of the coil array.
Notes:
1. Positive values show that the vertical range or the lateral offset indicated by the
350 System was greater than the distance measured using a tape measure.
2. The response of the 350 System proved to be symmetrical about its central axis. The following tables therefore show only the response to the port side.
3. Lateral offsets, vertical range, and errors are all listed in units of centimetres.
4. ‘o/s’ signifies that the 350 System switched to one-sided calculations – to indicate which
side the cable lay but not its offset distance.
Tables 8–1 and 8–2 indicate the measurement accuracy that you may achieve using the
350 System under ideal conditions. These tables are for general information only – you
should not use them to correct measurements you have already taken.
Table 8–1: Vertical measurement errors
Vertical
range
Lateral offset
-800
-600
-400
-300
-250
-220
-200
-180
-160
-140
-120
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
500
-129
-95
-58
-27
-27
-28
-26
-22
-15
-14
-10
-10
-9
-7
-6
-2
-1
400
-89
-74
-37
-12
-12
-11
-9
-6
-4
-4
-2
-4
-5
-4
0
3
5
350
-72
-64
-34
-11
-11
-7
-3
-2
-1
1
2
2
1
3
4
7
8
300
-48
-44
-24
-7
-5
-2
0
2
1
2
3
2
2
1
5
8
11
250
-19
-34
-22
-7
-4
-3
-1
0
1
2
4
3
4
4
4
4
6
200
-29
-27
-16
-4
-2
1
2
3
1
4
5
4
2
1
2
1
7
180
o/s
o/s
-15
-4
-2
-1
1
2
3
5
5
5
3
2
-1
2
6
160
o/s
-10
-14
-3
-2
0
2
2
2
2
3
4
3
2
0
4
6
140
o/s
o/s
-9
-2
0
2
3
3
3
5
6
6
5
3
0
2
4
120
o/s
o/s
-4
-1
1
3
4
4
5
4
3
4
4
4
2
4
4
100
o/s
o/s
1
1
0
1
2
3
3
4
6
4
3
1
0
2
1
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 10
8 – System Specifications
Table 8–2: Lateral measurement errors
Vertical
range
Lateral offset
-800
-600
-400
-300
-250
-220
-200
-180
-160
-140
-120
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
500
-48
-1
13
12
18
12
8
9
10
5
3
3
3
1
-1
-5
–
400
-9
-3
19
13
16
12
8
1
12
4
5
4
5
1
-2
-5
–
350
9
14
14
13
15
12
8
9
11
4
5
4
5
1
-2
-5
–
300
45
28
18
15
15
12
8
9
9
4
4
4
4
1
-3
-6
–
250
146
46
17
15
14
14
8
9
9
4
4
4
4
2
-3
-6
–
200
239
60
22
18
16
14
10
10
9
3
4
4
3
1
-4
-6
–
180
o/s
o/s
24
18
16
14
11
10
10
3
4
5
3
0
-4
-6
–
160
o/s
149
32
23
18
15
12
11
11
4
5
5
2
0
-5
-7
–
140
o/s
o/s
35
23
12
16
15
11
12
4
5
5
2
-1
-5
-7
–
120
o/s
o/s
58
26
25
16
17
11
14
5
7
5
2
-1
-5
-8
–
100
o/s
o/s
81
36
29
17
19
12
16
5
8
5
2
-2
-7
-8
–
8.4 UPDATE RATE
You may set the rate at which the 350 System supplies measurements to an external
data logger to either one or four records per second.
Update rates available from independent seabed profiling Systems may be different
from the update rate you have set for the 350 System. If your ROV includes both
these systems, you must allow for their different update rates when you analyse the
survey data.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 10
9 – Maintenance
9 MAINTENANCE
You will find it easier to identify and clear a fault on the 350 System if you have a full
understanding of the location of the individual sub-assemblies, and of the way they
interact. This section helps you to maintain and service the System by describing the
main internal components of the sub-sea installation.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD
Mains power supply voltages can cause death or serious injury by electric shock.
Only a competent engineer who has received the relevant training and experience
should perform maintenance work on electrical equipment.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the electrical supply before you work on any
equipment that uses a mains power supply. Arrange to discharge any power supply
storage capacitors safely.
Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while you perform any maintenance work on electrically powered equipment.
Do not connect the equipment to an electrical supply until you have refitted all safety
covers and ground connections.
9.1 Circuit Description
Page 2
The simple descriptions of circuit boards in the SEP assist you in the identification of
a potential fault. Refer to the circuit diagrams in section 10 while you read the descriptions.
9.2 Disassembly and Reassembly
Page 9
To maintain the depth rating of the sub-sea installation, follow these instructions carefully to disassemble and reassemble the SEP.
9.3 Fault Identification
Page 16
These flow charts should help engineers to identify and correct a fault condition on
the SEP quickly and efficiently. The standard System includes a field support kit with
replacement circuit boards and components to help reduce downtime if a fault develops.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
9.1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The sub-sea installation consists of two principal parts:
❐
The array of sensing coils
❐
The Sub-sea Electronics Pod (SEP).
Additionally, the sub-sea installation might include an altimeter.
Figure 9–1 shows how these are interconnected.
Figure 9–1: Simplified interconnection diagram – Sub-sea installation
section 10 includes the electrical drawings for the System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 26
9 – Maintenance
9.1.1 Sensing Coils
See drawing number 401105 in sub-section 10
The coil array includes six identical and electrically independent sensing coils, each of
which includes an internal pre-amplifier board. Drawing number 401105 shows the
pre-amplifier board for a single coil. The pre-amplifier board receives power through
the coil connection cable.
CAUTION
Any water entering the coil housing will cause permanent damage to the coil winding
and to the pre-amplifier board.
TSS matches and calibrates the pre-amplifier boards carefully to their specific coil
windings during manufacture. You must not remove these items from the coil housings, which contain no user-serviceable parts.
To avoid damage to the coils, do not remove the brass end-caps from the coil housings. You will invalidate the warranty if you open a coil housing for any reason.
Connection between the coil winding and the input to the pre-amplifier is through a 2pin Molex connector PL1. Signals from the coil windings arrive at the input to a lownoise buffer amplifier U1 that provides two functions:
❐
Four different gain settings. TSS establishes these settings during manufacture by
setting link LK1.
❐
Low-pass filtering with a cut-off frequency of 300Hz.
The diode assemblies D1 and D4 provide input protection. The buffered signals from
the coils then arrive at a band-pass filter formed by U2 and U3 to improve noise attenuation. This filter arrangement has a pass band from 7.2Hz to 318Hz.
U4 and U6 provide low noise programmable amplification with absolute gain settings
of ×1, ×2, ×4, or ×8 according to the control voltages on pins 1 and 2 of the coil connector PL2.
The output from the amplifier U4 splits, with one half inverted by U5, to provide a differential signal output on pins 3 and 4 of PL2. This differential signal passes through a
twisted pair in the coil connection cable to the SEP input.
Power supplies for the pre-amplifier board enter through PL2 pin 5 (+12V) and pin 6
(–12V), with the ground connection on pin 7.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
9.1.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
The SEP provides all the power supply, signal processing and communication functions for the sub-sea installation of the 350 System.
9.1.2.1 Analogue-to-Digital Converter
See drawing number 401104 in sub-section 10.
Differential analogue signals from the port coil triad arrive at the input to the SEP on
PL2 pins 3/4 (lateral), pins 5/6 (fore-aft) and pins 7/8 (vertical).
Similarly, the differential analogue signals from the starboard coil triad arrive at the
input to the SEP on PL3 pins 3/4 (lateral), pins 5/6 (fore-aft) and pins 7/8 (vertical).
The connectors PL2 and PL3 also carry the +12V and –12V supplies, used by the
pre-amplifier boards, on pins 9 and 10 respectively.
The SEP uses three separate dual-channel ADCs to perform the analogue-to-digital
conversions. This process happens simultaneously on all six input channels. Each of
the ADCs is identical – drawing 401104-2 shows a single dual-channel arrangement
for the starboard lateral and vertical coils. Drawings 401104-3 and 401104-4 show
the port lateral and vertical coil ADC, and the port/starboard fore-aft coil ADC respectively.
For simplicity, the following description includes only the two ADC channels shown in
drawing 401104-2. The description is also valid for the other channels:
U2/U3 and U4/U5 buffer the differential input signals from each coil before they pass
to their appropriate differential input channels of the ADC U1. Except for the application of some low-pass anti-aliasing filtering, no signal processing occurs before the
ADC.
The diode array D1–D8 provides protection for both differential ADC input channels.
The ADC device U1 is an 18-bit dual-channel converter that must receive low-noise
signals and power supplies. The ADC has separate analogue and digital grounds to
support this requirement.
In drawing 401104-2, ‘Region 1a’ is the low-noise analogue section of the ADC board
with all its power supply lines filtered and conditioned. Additionally, the digital signals
that pass between the ADC board and the Processor Board are opto-isolated to
reduce noise conduction.
The serial output from the ADC, which appears at pin 15 of U1, is a multiplexed combination of the two input channels. Pin 13 of U1 supplies a gate-control signal to identify which of the two input channels is currently being transmitted.
Pin 16 of U1 provides a frame-sync signal to identify the start and end of each 18-bit
ADC output sequence.
Opto-isolators U10 and U11 protect the serial data, gate-control, and frame-sync outputs before they pass through a ribbon cable to the Processor Board.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 26
9 – Maintenance
Opto-isolated digital inputs to the ADC are:
❐
Analogue and digital power-down APD/DPD (through U12) to control the ADC
mode of operation. The ADC Board uses these for its self-calibration during initialisation.
❐
The clock signal from the Processor Board (through U13).
❐
Pre-amp gain control (through U14) to set the absolute gain of the pre-amplifier
using U6 of the Coil Pre-amplifier Board (see drawing 401105).
9.1.2.2 Processor Board
See drawing 401103 in section 10.
The Processor Board consists of three sub-sections:
❐
The ADC Interface (drawing 401103-4)
❐
The Processor Core (drawing 401103-2)
❐
The communications interface (drawing 401103-3)
1. ADC Interface (see drawing 401103-4).
The ADC Interface takes the three serial data lines from the ADC Board and multiplexes them onto one processor bus.
The three serial data inputs ‘SD1’, ‘SD2’ and ‘SD3’ arrive at the ADC Interface
through pins 3, 7 and 11 respectively of PL5. ‘SD1’ contains the starboard lateral and
vertical channels, ‘SD2’ contains the port lateral and vertical channels and ‘SD3’ contains both fore-aft channels. The gate-control and frame-sync signals for each channel arrive at pins 4/6, 8/10 and 12/14 of PL5.
The ADC Interface uses three separate and identical channels to process all three
serial data inputs simultaneously. For each channel, the serial data that originates
from one coil passes into serial-to-parallel buffers under the control of the frame-sync
and clock signals.
When these buffers are loaded fully with data, an interrupt signal causes the processor to read each parallel port U53–U55 in turn. The processor knows which of the two
coils in each channel is being read, by the state of the gate-control signal that is
included as bit number 18 of the parallel output.
Once the processor has read the output buffers, data from the other coil in each channel passes into the buffers to be read by the processor.
Since all three channels on the ADC Interface run from the same clock, they will
remain synchronised perfectly and will always maintain the correct timing relationships.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
2. Processor Core (see drawing 401103-2).
Data from the ADC Interface arrives at the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) U1.
The DSP operates with four parallel bytes of zero wait state SRAM forming 32-bit
words. It reads its program from EPROM U12 at power-on and copies it into RAM for
execution in a manner similar to a PC ‘booting’ from a disk.
Byte-wide E2PROM U11 provides non-volatile parameter storage, and PLD U5 implements primary decoding.
SCC devices U17 and U18 handle communications to and from the SEP: U17 handles communications with the SDC and the direct communications from the sub-sea
altimeter. This version of the SEP does not use U18.
Buffer U57 provides the gain control signals for the pre-amplifiers and the ADC control signals APD, DPD and CMODE.
3. Communications Interface (see drawing 401103-3).
U19 and U20 opto-isolate the current-loop signals that pass between the SEP and the
SDC.
U22, U23, U24 and U25 respectively control the RS232, 2-wire and 4-wire currentloop communications. The settings of links LK1 to LK5 select among four options (see
sub-section 4.2.2.1 for instructions to change the communications method). Note that
the current version of SDC does not support the fourth method, RS422 communications.
Opto-isolators U28 and U29, and ICs U31 and U32 support direct communications to
the SEP from an altimeter.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 26
9 – Maintenance
9.1.2.3 Power Supply
Power for the sub-sea components of the 350 System comes from the ROV electrical
distribution system. The standard configuration for the sub-sea 350 System accepts
an electrical supply in the range 110 to 120V at 45 to 65Hz. An alternative SEP is
available from TSS for use with installations that must operate from an electrical supply in the range 220 to 240V.
WARNING
Do not attempt to modify the SEP to use an incorrect electrical supply. A label on the
SEP identifies the correct SEP operating voltage.
The power supply circuit provides conditioned and stabilised voltages of +24V, +15V,
–15V and +5V to drive all the components of the sub-sea installation (the SEP, the
coil pre-amplifiers and an altimeter connected to the SEP).
Cooling of the supply is by direct thermal conduction to the SEP housing assisted by
a small fan.
WARNING
There is a danger of electric shock from mains voltages on the Power Supply board.
Do not open the SEP with power connected. Except for the fuse on its input, the Power
Supply board is NOT field repairable. You must renew the Power Supply board as a
complete unit if you suspect it has developed a fault.
9.1.3 Current Loop
When you configure the System to use the 2-wire current-loop communications
method, the SEP and the SDC share a twisted pair in the umbilical. To avoid possible
contention, the 350 System assigns ‘Master’ status to the SDC, and ‘Slave’ status to
the SEP.
Immediately after you power-on the 350 System, the SEP transmits a short ‘banner’
message to the SDC and then waits for commands to arrive. Other than its initial banner message, the SEP will not transmit data until it receives a carriage-return signal
from the SDC.
The SEP Processor Board generates current at 20mA for the communication loop.
The ‘COMMS’ LED on the SDC is in series with the current-loop and therefore confirms that the communication loop is intact when it shows red. Note that the COMMS
LED does NOT confirm successful communication between the SEP and SDC, but
shows only that the loop is intact.
Figure 9–2 shows a simplified schematic of the current-loop, including the optically
isolated I/O ports at both ends of the umbilical cable.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 9–2: Simplified schematic of the current-loop
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 26
9 – Maintenance
9.2 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
WARNING
ELECTRICAL HAZARD
Mains power supply voltages can cause death or serious injury by electric shock.
Only a competent engineer who has received the relevant training and experience
should perform maintenance work on electrical equipment.
Power-off and isolate the equipment from the electrical supply before you work on any
equipment that uses a mains power supply. Arrange to discharge any power supply
storage capacitors safely.
Observe all relevant local and national safety regulations while you perform any maintenance work on electrically powered equipment.
Do not connect the equipment to an electrical supply until you have refitted all safety
covers and ground connections.
9.2.1 Surface Display Computer
CAUTION
Many components within the SDC are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic discharge. You must take precautions against such damage: These precautions include
the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap. TSS (International) Ltd will not
accept responsibility for any damage caused by failure to take such precautionary
measures.
The following instructions are valid for the SDC Type 9 that the 350 Cable Survey System is shipped with. The 350 System will not work with earlier versions of our SDCs
due to this being the first system to operate under the WindowsTM environment. Contact TSS (International) Ltd for advice if necessary.
You will NOT need to disassemble the SDC if you must change the communication settings. It is externally configurable using a tristate switch on the Converter Card.
9.2.2 Sub-sea Electronics Pod
CAUTION
Many components within the SEP are susceptible to damage due to electrostatic discharge. You must take precautions against such damage: These precautions include
the use of a grounded conductive mat and wrist-strap. TSS will not accept responsibility for any damage caused by failure to take such precautionary measures.
To disassemble and reassemble the SEP you will need the following tools and facilities:
❐
A clean anti-static work area
❐
A 3mm hexagonal key
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
❐
A 2.5mm hexagonal key
Remove the ‘Power/Comms’ end-cap:
1. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to release and remove the four M4 × 12mm A4 stainless-steel screws that secure the end-cap to the housing.
2. Use the 2.5mm hexagonal key to remove the two button head screws from their
threaded holes near the edge of the end-cap.
3. Insert two of the M4 × 12mm screws into the holes vacated by the button head
screws and tighten them by hand until you feel resistance.
4. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to tighten the two M4 × 12mm screws alternately so
that they lift the end-cap away from the SEP housing.
5. After you have screwed the two jacking screws home, use your fingers to ease the
end-cap away from the SEP housing. Note that a partial vacuum may form inside
the housing and this may make it difficult to remove the end-cap. Do not insert
any hard or sharp instruments into the gap to act as a lever because this
may scratch the surface, following which corrosion will occur.
6. Remove the two jacking screws from the end-cap.
7. Do not allow strain to develop on the internal connectors as you ease the end-cap
away from the SEP housing. Disconnect the 8-way and the 6-way internal connectors by pressing their two side-clips together and pulling the plugs and sockets
apart.
8. Disconnect the ground strap by pulling the spade connector and receptacle apart.
Remove the coil connector end-cap:
9. Remove the four M4 × 12mm A4 stainless-steel screws as before. Substitute two
of these screws in place of the two button head screws to jack the end-cap away
from the SEP housing. Remove the jacking screws from the end-cap.
10. Remove the end-cap carefully – note that it carries all the circuit board assemblies. Handle this assembly with care. Pull the end-cap carefully until the entire
assembly is free of the SEP housing and place it on the clean anti-static work surface. Save the pack of desiccant that is wedged underneath the circuit-board
assembly and store it in a warm dry place while you work on the circuitry.
11. The Processor Board is located on one side of the central support block, and the
ADC and the Power Supply boards are located together on the other side.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 26
9 – Maintenance
To remove and reinstall any of the boards perform the following:
Processor Board (see Figure 9–3):
IMPORTANT NOTE
The Processor Board holds calibration data for the ADC Board. Therefore, you must
renew the Processor Board and the ADC Board together if you suspect either is faulty.
You will degrade System performance if you do not follow this advice.
1. Unclip and release the 4-way ‘Primary Comms’ connector PL2. Unclip and release
the 8-way connector PL1. Unclip and release the 34-way connector PL5.
2. Use a 3mm hexagonal key to release and remove the eight M4 × 14mm stainless
steel screws that secure the board to the support block and remove the Processor
Board.
3. Refit the board by reversing the above procedure.
Figure 9–3: Processor Board layout
TP4
U17
SDC
Alt
PL5
SL
SV
SD2
U45
U44
U43
PL
PV
SD3
U50
U49
U48
U55
U54
U53
PF/A
SF/A
Parallel
O/P ports
SD1
U38
U37
U36
ADC Interface
U10
U9
U8
U7
U11
E PROM
NVM
2
U12
EPROM
U18
R/P Sens
COMMS LK1
U13
DSP
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
D1
PL2
Primary Comms
PL3
Altimeter
D2
U5
PL4
R/P Sensor
PL1
Processor Board
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
ADC Board (see Figure 9–4):
IMPORTANT NOTE
The Processor Board holds calibration data for the ADC Board. Therefore, you must
renew the Processor Board and the ADC Board together if you suspect either is faulty.
You will degrade System performance if you do not follow this advice.
1. Unclip and release the 34-way connector PL1. Unclip and release the two 11-way
connectors PL2 and PL3.
2. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to release the four M4 × 12mm screws that secure
the ADC Board to the support block. Remove the ADC Board.
3. Refit the board by reversing the above procedure.
Figure 9–4: ADC Board layout
18-bit dual channel ADC
PL2
SD1
SL SV
U1
PL3
SD2
PL PV
U20
ADC Board
DPN 402197
PL1
SD3
PF/A SF/A
U30
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 26
9 – Maintenance
Power Supply Board (see Figure 9–5):
1. Release and remove the insulating cover that protects the Power Supply board.
Unclip and release the 10-way connector. Unclip and release the 5-way connector
that is near the 2A fuse.
2. Use the 3mm hexagonal key to release the four M4 × 12mm screws that secure
the Power Supply board to the support block. Remove the Power Supply board.
Retain the four insulated spacers and all insulated inserts.
3. Check the 20mm 2A fastblow fuse on the Power Supply board and fit a new one if
it has failed. Investigate the cause of any repeated fuse failure.
4. Refit the board by reversing the above procedure. Make certain that you refit all
the insulated spacers and inserts when you reassemble the Power Supply board
to the support block. Refit the insulating cover over the Power Supply board.
Figure 9–5: Power Supply Board layout
CAUTION
Do not attempt to modify the Power Supply board so that it operates from an incorrect
electrical supply.
Reassemble the SEP:
1. Check the condition of the two rubber O-rings that seal each of the end-caps.
Clean or renew them if necessary. Apply a thin smear of approved lubricant to the
rings to ensure they make an efficient seal when you reassemble the SEP. For
this purpose, use the same type of lubricant that you use for the sub-sea
electrical connectors – refer to sub-section 4.1.2 for these important instructions.
2. Orientate the circuit board assemblies on the support block:
Place the empty SEP housing left-to-right in front of you. Make certain that the
short grounding lead inside the SEP housing is towards the right-hand end of the
housing. You must insert the coil connector end-cap into the housing from
the opposite end to the grounding lead.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
Align the end-cap and the electronics assembly so that the two external connectors are horizontal and the Processor Board faces towards you (see Figure 9–6).
Figure 9–6: Orientation of the coil connector end-cap
3. Place the desiccant pack inside so that it fits between the Processor Board and
the SEP housing. Make certain that there are no trapped wires or components and
push the end-cap home.
4. Carefully align the end-cap to the SEP housing so that the four securing screws
will engage properly. If necessary, turn the end-cap slightly to achieve perfect
alignment. Ensure that the two holes for the button head screws align with the
hardened stainless steel inserts on the end of the SEP housing.
5. Insert the four M4 × 12mm A4 stainless steel screws and use the 3mm hexagonal
key to tighten them evenly. Insert both button head screws and tighten them
lightly.
6. Reconnect the ground wire, the 8-way and the 6-way connectors on the ‘Power/
Comms’ end-cap. Make certain both locking clips on each of the connectors
engage properly.
7. Align and engage the ‘Power/Comms’ end-cap into the SEP housing. Make certain both holes for the button head screws align with the hardened stainless steel
inserts in the end of the SEP housing.
8. Make certain there are no trapped wires and press the end-cap home. Twist the
end-cap slightly if necessary to achieve perfect alignment of the screw holes. As
you replace the end-cap, the SEP housing may become slightly pressurised which
may make the cap difficult to replace. Do not apply excessive force.
9. Insert the four M4 × 12mm A4 stainless steel screws and use the 3mm hexagonal
key to tighten them evenly. Insert both button head screws and tighten them
lightly.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 14 of 26
9 – Maintenance
9.2.3 Coil Cable Continuity
Table 9–1 lists the pin-to-pin connections in the coil cables. You may use this information to test the continuity of the cable during maintenance work.
Table 9–1: Connections to the coil cable
Sensing coil 8-way connector
Description
SEP 12-way connector
Pin No
Pin No
Description
G0 – Pre-amp gain control line
1
­
1
G0 – Pre-amp gain control line
G1 – Pre-amp gain control line
2
­
2
G1 – Pre-amp gain control line
Signal + (Lateral)
3
­
3
Lateral coil signal +
Signal –(Lateral)
4
­
4
Lateral coil signal –
Signal + (Fore-aft)
3
­
5
Fore-aft coil signal +
Signal –(Fore-aft)
4
­
6
Fore-aft coil signal –
Signal + (Vertical)
3
­
7
Vertical coil signal +
Signal –(Vertical)
4
­
8
Vertical coil signal –
+12V supply in
5
­
9
+12V supply out
–12V supply in
6
­
10
–12V supply out
Analogue ground
7
­
11
Analogue ground
12
Screen chassis
The two cables are identical. Although you may interchange the coils, you must couple the vertical, lateral and fore-aft coils to their correct 8-way connectors on the
cable. Labels identify the cable tails.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 15 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
9.3 FAULT IDENTIFICATION
The remainder of this section includes advice and a series of flow charts to help you
locate a fault in the sub-sea components of the 350 System.
TSS has gathered considerable experience with the 350 System in many survey operations and under a variety of conditions, and has used this experience to compose the
following flow charts.
If your System fails, perform the following checks before you call TSS engineers for
assistance.
1. Check that you have installed the 350 System correctly according to the instructions in Sections 3 and 4.
2. Check that the configuration of the 350 System is correct. Refer to sub-section
6.2.2 for details of the System Parameters dialog.
3. Check that you have connected all cables correctly.
4. Check that the correct electrical supplies are available to the SDC and the SEP.
5. Identify the fault symptoms as clearly as possible, and apply the appropriate fault
identification routine from the following list:
Fault on a single channel only – see sub-section 9.3.1.
Communications failure – see sub-section 9.3.2.
Poor tracking performance – see sub-section 9.3.3.
Altimeter failure – see sub-section 9.3.4.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 16 of 26
9 – Maintenance
9.3.1 Fault on a Single Channel
Figure 9–7: Single channel failure
Single channel fault
Power-off the System
Swap the coil cable
on the faulty side.
Is the
channel
working?
Yes
Renew the faulty
coil cable
No
Swap the coil on the
faulty channel
Is the
channel
working?
No
Renew the faulty coil.
See sub-section 3.3.2.
Yes
Disassemble the SEP.
See sub-section 9.2.2
Enter new calibration
details into SDC.
See sub-section 6.2.2.
Check connections and
wiring to the ADC Board
Is the
wiring
good?
No
Repair or renew the
connector wiring.
Yes
Renew the ADC Board
Is the
channel
working?
No
Contact TSS for advice
Yes
Resume the survey
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 17 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
9.3.2 Communications Failure
Figure 9–8: Communications failure – CHART 1
Communication
failure
Use terminal mode to
check SEP comms.
No
Is SDC
COMMS
LED on?
Yes
See sub-section 6.2.1.4
for terminal mode
No
Comms
OK?
Power-off the System.
Yes
Disconnect the SEP
Power/Comms cable
LED or wiring failure.
Repair as necessary
Continuity check the
cable and umbilical
Connect AC voltmeter
across pins 1 & 3
Power-on the System
Look for 240V instead
if your SEP operates
from a 240V supply
110V
±20%
OK?
No
Check the mains
power supply source
Yes
Power-off the System
Reconnect the SEP
Power/Comms cable
Go to CHART 2
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 18 of 26
9 – Maintenance
Figure 9–9: Communications failure – CHART 2
From CHART 1
Disassemble the SEP
Check and repair any
obvious damage
Check continuity
of SEP connectors
Is
wiring
OK?
No
Repair/renew
connector wiring
Yes
Check correct COMMS
method installed in SDC
COMMS
method
OK?
No
Install correct method
Yes
Check all five links on
SEP Processor Board
Are
SEP links
set OK?
No
Set all links correctly
Yes
Go to CHART 3
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 19 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 9–10: Communications failure – CHART 3
From CHART 2
Reconnect 12-way and
6-way connectors
Power-on the System
Check supply LEDs on
Power Supply Board
All
LEDs
on?
No
Yes
Check wiring and
supply voltages
Renew faulty board
Check internal wiring
to all boards
Is
wiring
OK?
No
Repair as necessary
Yes
Disconnect PL2
on Processor Board
2-wire
current-loop
Short pins 1 & 2 on
Processor Board PL2
LEDs
D1 D3 D4
on?
4-wire
current-loop
Comms
method?
Yes
Short pins 3 & 4 on
Processor Board PL2
No
No
Yes
Change Processor PCB
Yes
Reassemble the SEP
LEDs
D1 D4
on?
Check cable continuity
COMMS
OK?
No
Contact TSS for advice
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 20 of 26
9 – Maintenance
9.3.3 Poor Tracking Performance
Figure 9–11: Poor tracking performance
Poor tracking
performance
All
coils
OK?
No
See sub-section 9.3.1
Yes
Coil
connections
OK?
No
Connect coils
correctly
Yes
Is
tone
noisy?
Yes
Use a different
tone frequency
No
System
setup
OK?
No
Reconfigure System
correctly
Yes
Coil
separation
>1.4m?
No
Increase coil
separation
Yes
Contact TSS for advice
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 21 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
9.3.4 Altimeter Failure
These flow charts should help you to identify a fault with the TSS or the Datasonics
altimeter connected directly to the SEP. Refer to the altimeter manual for further
assistance if necessary.
If a fault develops when you use an alternative altimeter connected to the SDC COM2
port, check it using the terminal mode and check the data strings against those listed
in sub-section 7.3.3. Refer to sub-section 6.2.1.4 for details of the terminal mode.
If there are no data strings from the altimeter, check the RS232 parameters and the
wiring. Refer to the altimeter manual for specific servicing details.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 22 of 26
9 – Maintenance
Figure 9–12: Altimeter failure – CHART 1
Altimeter failure
Select terminal mode
icon from toolbar
Ensure "350SEP" selected
Screen
updates
OK?
No
Clear COMMS problem
Yes
Select Altimeter config,
then press altimeter test.
Data
OK from
altimeter?
Yes
Comms from altimeter
are good
No
Press OK to end test
Check correct altimeter
type is selected
Is
altimeter
updating?
Yes
Altimeter is good
No
Refer altimeter manual
Go to CHART 2
DPN 402197
Contact TSS for advice
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 23 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 9–13: Altimeter failure – CHART 2
From CHART 1
Power-off the System
Disconnect cable from
altimeter
Remove the four screws
in the altimeter end-cap
Continuity check
altimeter cable
Is
wiring
OK?
No
Renew altimeter cable
Yes
Connect a 470 ohm
1 watt resistor between
pins 1 and 3 of the SEP
altimeter port.
Set DC voltmeter to
pins 1 (+) and 3 (-) of
SEP altimeter port
18V
±2V
OK?
Yes
Refer altimeter manual
No
Contact TSS for advice
Disassemble the SEP
Check wiring to end-cap
Is
wiring
OK?
No
Repair/renew wiring
Yes
Renew the SEP
Processor Board
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 24 of 26
9 – Maintenance
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 25 of 26
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 26 of 26
10 – System Drawings
10 SYSTEM DRAWINGS
Drawing Number
Description
Stainless Steel
Drawing Number*
Electrical Drawings
490234
Sub-sea Electronics Pod – Overall diagram
401105
Coil pre-amplifier
401104–1
Analogue to Digital conversion
401104–2
Analogue to Digital conversion – ADC 1
401104–3
Analogue to Digital conversion – ADC 2
401104–4
Analogue to Digital conversion – ADC 3
401103–1
Processor Board
401103–2
Processor Board – CPU Core
401103–3
Processor Board – Comms
401103–4
Processor Board – ADC Interface
Mechanical Drawings
490221
350CE Cable Survey System Assembly (110v).
This drawing is also applicable to Part Number 490222 (240v) Assembly
B930476
350CE 3-axis coil cable assembly
B930473
ROV Tail Assembly – 4.0m standard
490223 (110v)
490224 (240v)
* Stainless Steel Drawing Numbers included in this table for information only. For
details and specification see the corresponding Standard Product Drawing Number.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 10–1: 490234 Sub-sea Electronics Pod - Overall diagram
D
C
B
A
A
CCT
REV
5
PCB
ISS
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DATE
JP
ED
BY
SJ
CHK
BY
7
7
601001
3 AXIS COIL CABLE
601001
3 AXIS COIL CABLE
Port coil assembly
Pream.&.Coil
G0
G1
PX+
PX+12V
-12V
AGND
401105
Preamp & Coil
G0
G1
PY+
PY+12V
-12V
AGND
401105
Preamp & Coil
G0
G1
PZ+
PZ+12V
-12V
AGND
401105
Preamp & Coil
G0
G1
SX+
SX+12V
-12V
AGND
401105
Preamp & Coil
G0
G1
SY+
SY+12V
-12V
AGND
401105
Preamp & Coil
G0
G1
SZ+
SZ+12V
-12V
AGND
401105
Stbd coil assembly
ECR
NOs
10 JAN 03
REVISION HISTORY
First
issue
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6
G0
G1
PX+
PXPY+
PYPZ+
PZ+12V
-12v
AGND
G0
G1
SX+
SXSY+
SYSZ+
SZ+12V
-12v
AGND
END CAP EARTH
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MOLEX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MOLEX
RED
PL2
PL3
401104
ADC BOARD
FAN
CHASSIS EARTH
PL1
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
IDC
BLACK
5
Processor Pod
GND
GND
/SDATA1
/LEFT1
/SCLK1
/FSNC1
/SDATA2
/LEFT2
/SCLK2
/FSNC2
/SDATA3
/LEFT3
/SCLK3
/FSNC3
GND
G0
G1
DPD
APD
CMODE
GND
TCLK0
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+15v
+15V
AGND
AGND
-15V
-15V
GND
GND
+24V
PCOM
+5V
GND
+15V
AGND
-15V
+24V
PCOM
+15V
AGND
-15V
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
4
PL5
Processor Board
PL4
1
2
3
4
5
6
ITxD3
IRxD3
ICOM3
+24V
PGND
ITxD2
IRxD2
ICOM2
+24V
PGND
COMMS1
COMMS2
COMMS3
COMMS4
MOLEX
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
QM
QM
1
2
3
4
5
6
QM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
SPADE
1
SPADE
POD EARTH
PCB EARTH
1 EARTH
2
3 LIVE
4
5 NEUTRAL
MOLEX
1
2
3
4
MOLEX
1
2
3
4
5
6
MOLEX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PL2
PL3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
QM
PSU
401103
PL1
IDC
MOLEX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MOLEX
308012
4
2
PGND
+24V
IRxD3
ICOM3
ITxD3
PGND
EARTH SCREW NO.1
+24V
IRxD2
ICOM2
ITxD2
NEUTRAL
LIVE
Rx (RS232)
Tx (RS232)
ICOM2
NEUTRAL
LIVE
COMMS1
COMMS2
COMMS3
COMMS4
EARTH SCREW NO.2
EARTH SCREW NO.3
End Cap Assembly 'A'
1
2
3
4
5
6
QM
1
2
3
4
5
6
QM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
QM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
QM
1
SPADE
1
SPADE
400020
Document Number
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
IE55V
2006
1
2
3
4
5
6
IE55V
2006
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IE55V
2008
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IE55
2008
Thursday, December 18, 2003
490234A1
EXTERNAL
ROLL-PITCH
SENSOR
(TSS 332)
EXTERNAL
ALTIMETER
AUX OUTPUT
COMMS &
SURFACE
POWER FROM
SURFACE
Sheet
1
1
1
of
1
Rev
A
350 TYPE 2 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM (440 COMPATIBLE) - SUBSEA POD
(C) VT TSS Ltd. 2003
New Mill
New Mill Lane
W itney
Oxfordshire 0X29 9SN
Title
Size
A3
Date:
D
C
B
A
Page 2 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
10 – System Drawings
Figure 10–2: 401105 Coil Pre-amp
PL1
1
2
Molex
5045-2
CCT
REV
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
5
PCB
ISS
--588
614
1002
1294
1240
1579
1724
ECR
NOs
R1
47R
C1
100p
1206
C15
470p
0402
V+
V-
R20
0R0
IN
D4
S2M
SIG3
8
13
14
3
3
2
U4
+
-
R2
1M0
D1
S2M
6
EN
A0
A1
A2
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
OP27GS
SOIC
U6
D
V+
GND
V-
DG408
SOIC
1
0
4
DB
DB
CHK
BY
C12
C7
100n
PPS
470p
0402
G0
G1
2
3
U1
+
-
OrCad
Power
link to
Op-amps
R3
180R
AD797AR
SOIC
6
GAIN = 1.5 (LK1 OPEN)
3dB CUTOFF @ 300Hz NOM.
4
5
6
7
12
11
10
9
1
16
15
1
1
8
2
PROGRAMMABLE GAIN SELECTION:
0
1
2
ED
BY
0
0
1
DATE
RPM
MI
MI
TG
TWT
TWT
SW
DB
BB
G1
G0
GAIN
23FEB95
04JUL95
11SEP95
06FEB95
17SEP99
22SEP99
19April00
16 OCT 00
14 AUG 01
GND3
REVISION HISTORY
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
R16
20K
R17
8K2
R18
3K3
R19
2K2
LK5
R4
100R
LK6
R21
22k
2
3
R22
0R0
R23
22k
U5
+
U1
C3
47n
PPS
C4
C8
22u
16V
DC5
47n
DC6
47n
U3
47n
PPS
2 Pole Butterworth Low Pass
Breakpoint 318Hz
R10
10K
R12
R8
22k
U6
DC14
47n
DC13
47n
V-
C11
100p
1206
V+
GND2
R9
39k
DC11
47n
DC12
47n
-12V2
C14
C6
47n
PPS
470p
0402
R25
47R
R26
47R
R29
R24
47R
R27
47R
AGND
+12V2
47R
D3
BZX84C
12V
R28
47R
D2
BZX84C
12V
10K
2
3
C5
6
R6
U2
C10
100p
1206
LK9
DC9
47n
DC10
47n
U5
OP27GS
SOIC
-
+
47n
PPS
2
3
470k
U4
R7
470k
DC8
47n
DC7
47n
C9
22u
16V
470p
0402
C13
2 Pole Butterworth High Pass
Breakpoint 7.2Hz
U2
GND3
SIG3
GND2
SIG2
6
DC4
47n
DC3
47n
G0
G1
OP27GS
SOIC
DC2
22u
16V
DC1
22u
16V
DIFFERENTIAL
OUTPUT
470p
0402
C16
R5
1k5
C2
10p
1206
V+
V-
U3
+
-
6
OP27GS
SOIC
LK7
R14
22k
R15
39k
LK8
G0IN
G1IN
SIG+
SIG+12V1
-12V1
AGND
PL2
TO 8 WAY UNDERWATER
CONNECTOR ON ENDCAP
PIN-FOR-PIN WIRING;
U/W CON. PIN 8 IS
GROUND TO CAP BODY.
BOARD TO HAVE 2oz COPPER
ISSUE 5 PCB COMPLETE NEW LAYOUT
PCB NUMBER: 301076
PCB WEBS NOT TO OCCUR AT PL2
ALL THE LINKS TO BE TRACKED CLOSED
CAD NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
of
1
Rev
I
Connect to chassis ground
via mounting holes
Sheet
Pi- Filter Murata DSS306-55Y5S102M100
L1
L3
Pi-filter
Pi-filter
L4
L2
Pi-filter
L5
Pi-filter
Pi-filter
REFS NOT USED:
R11, R13
LK2,3,4
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Copyright TSS (UK) Ltd. 2000
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
Tuesday, August 14, 2001
Document Number
Title
COIL PREAMPLIFIER
Size
A3
401105i1.dwg
Date:
Page 3 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 10–3: 401104-1 Analogue to Digital Conversion
CCT
REV
2
2
2
2
PCB
ISS
TO PORT COIL
ASSEMBLY
TO STARBOARD
COIL ASSEMBLY
--614
1579
1621
ECR
NOs
REVISION HISTORY
A
B
C
D
PL2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
DATE
RPM
MI
DB
BB
ED
BY
PL3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
22FEB95
08SEP95
17 OCT 00
05 Jan 01
IG0
IG1
PX+
PXPY+
PYPZ+
PZ+12V
-12V
AGND
IG0
IG1
SX+
SXSY+
SYSZ+
SZ+12V
-12V
AGND
CHK
BY
SZ+
SZ-
D5V
SX+
SX-
IG0
IG1
IDPD
IAPD
ICMD
ICLKD
PZ+
PZ-
PX+
PXD5V
IDPD
IAPD
ICMD
ICLKD
PY+
PY-
SY+
SYD5V
IDPD
IAPD
ICMD
ICLKD
+12V
-12V
REGULATED
SUPPLY TO
(EXTERNAL)
PREAMPS
ADC #1
SZ+
SZ-
SD1
LR1
FS1
SK1
G0
G1
D5V
SX+
SX-
IG0
IG1
DPD
APD
FS3
SK3
LR3
SD3
FS2
SK2
LR2
SD2
CMODE
CLKD
IDPD
IAPD
ICMD
ICLKD
401104D2
ADC #2
PZ+
PZ-
PX+
PXD5V
IDPD
IAPD
ICM
ICLKD
401104D3
ADC #3
PY+
PY-
SY+
SYD5V
IDPD
IAPD
ICM
ICLKD
+12V
-12V
401104D4
LR1
SD1
SK1
FS1
DPD
APD
G0
G1
CMODE
CLKD
LR2
SD2
SK2
FS2
LR3
SD3
FS3
SK3
GND
+5V
+15V
AGND
-15V
GND
GND
SD1
LR1
SK1
FS1
SD2
LR2
SK2
FS2
SD3
LR3
SK3
FS3
GND
G0
G1
DPD
APD
CMODE
GND
CLKD
+5V
AGND
+15V
-15V
GND
PL1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
T&B
FROM PROCESSOR
BOARD (PL2)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
LOGIC GROUND
LOGIC +5V
DIGITAL POWER DOWN
ANALOGUE POWER DOWN
COUNT MODE
CLOCK
ANALOGUE GROUND
PORT X+ INPUT
PORT X- INPUT
STBD X+ INPUT
STBD X- INPUT
PORT Y+ INPUT
PORT Y- INPUT
STBD Y+ INPUT
STBD Y- INPUT
PORT Z+ INPUT
PORT Z- INPUT
STBD Z+ INPUT
STBD Z- INPUT
TESTPOINT LOCATION
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
STAR POINT
A
B
C
D
E
F
LK1
Sheet
1
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(c) TSS (UK) Ltd., 1995
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
Friday, January 05, 2001
Document Number
401104d1.dwg
Title
Size
A3
ANALOGUE TO DIGITAL CONVERSION
Date:
of
4
Rev
D
Page 4 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
10 – System Drawings
Figure 10–4: 401104-2 Analogue to Digital Conversion - ADC1
SZ+
SZ-
12
R1
1M0
GP
13
TP1L
AGND
C1
100p
NPO
TP1M
AGND
C2
100p
NPO
3
2
3
2
6
U2
OP27GP
+
-
6
U3
OP27GP
+
-
R5
39R
GP
C5
100n
R6
39R
GP
D1
+15V
1
DC1
1u0
35VT
U6
7805
I
D3
AGND
D2
O
D4
3
+5V1
DC2
1u0
35VT
DC4
AGND
R9
51R
GP
DC3
23
7
8
21
L2
BEAD
DC6
1u0
35VT
VD+
DGND
APD
DC5
VA+
DPD
U1
VL+
DGND
OCLKD
ICLKA
LEFT
SCLK
FSYNC
ICLKD
SDATA
SMODE
CMODE
ACAL
DCAL
TSTO1
TSTO2
INL+
INLINR+
INRREF+
REFLGND
AGND
VA-
IDPD
IAPD
DC13
1u0
35VT
2
17
10
12
11
ISD1
ISMD
ICMD
5
9
15
ILR1
ISK1
IFS1
ICLKD
DGND
DGND
13
14
16
19
20
22
18
SPLIT
GROUND
PLANE
LINKED
HERE
TP2B
D5V
DC23
DGND
TP2C
1
TP2D
5
U9C
TP2E
U9B
4
U9A
74HCT04
2
3
D5V
6
RP1E
1K
9
8
U9D
D5V
7
6
8
DGND
5
IAPD
IDPD
TP2F
DC24
D5V
7
6
5
ICLKD
ICMD
DGND
8
8
RP1B
1K
RP1D
1K
U12
VCC
O1
O2
GND
HCPL2430
U13
VCC
O1
O2
GND
HCPL2430
U14
VCC
A1
K1
K2
A2
A1
K1
K2
A2
A1
K1
1
2
RP2E
1K
3
4
1
2
RP2C
1K
3
4
1
2
RP2A
1K
1
3
4
Title
L5
10u
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 2b
13
9
RP2G
1K
2
+5V
DC27
GND
GND
SK1
FS1
+5V
SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL DATA
TO CPU BOARD
+5V
DC28
GND
APD
DPD
G1
G0
CMODE
COMMON CLOCK
& CLOCK MODE
CONTROL
FROM CPU
of
GAIN CONTROL
(TO PREAMPS)
2
4
CLKD
RP2H
1K
STARTUP
CONTROL
1
U15A
74HCT04
GND
Sheet
SD1
LR1
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
3
U15F
12
11
U15E
U15D
8
5
U15C
U15B
DC29
+5V
VCC
O1
O2
GND
HCPL2430
K2
A2
A1
K1
U10
RP1A
1K
1
2
3
4
O1
O2
VCC
GND
4
6
Friday, January 05, 2001
Document Number
401104d2.dwg
ANALOGUE TO DIGITAL CONVERSION - ADC #1
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
10
RP2F
1K
+5V
RP2D
1K
+5V
RP2B
1K
+5V
HCPL2430
K2
A2
A1
K1
U11
RP1C
1K
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
K2
A2
3
3
4
26
25
28
27
6
1
24
AK5390
LK1
TP2A
DC25
D5V
HCPL2430
1
R2
1M0
GP
DC8
100u
10VE
DC9
220n
AGND
TP1A
D5V
IAPD
IDPD
ICLKD
ICMD
IG0
IG1
CONTROL SIGNALS
TO OTHER CHANNELS
IG0
IG1
O1
O2
GND
5
U4
OP27GP
DC7
220n
D8
3
DC12
3
14
7
7
6
5
1
1
6
DGND
7
R7
D6
D7
O
-5V1
U7
7905
I
DC11
1u0
35VT
4
DC26
1
3
1
(c) TSS (UK) Ltd., 1995
2
TP1D
6
D5
2
DC10
1u0
35VT
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 2a
1
+
-
DC79
-15V
AGND
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 1a
4
3
2
39R
GP
C6
100n
R8
39R
GP
DC21
DC22
REFERENCES
NOT USED:
DC14
U8
L1
14
7
C3
100p
NPO
6
U5
OP27GP
+
-
V+
CHK
BY
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
1
4
R3
1M0
GP
AGND
3
2
+15V
+15V
DC19
ED
BY
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
6
1
4
Size
A3
1
5
6
5
Date:
1
9
TP1E
C4
100p
NPO
AGND
DC17
AGND
DC20
DATE
RPM
MI
DB
BB
-15V
ECR
NOs
22FEB95
11SEP95
17 OCT 00
05 Jan 01
8
5
R4
1M0
GP
DC15
DC18
V-
--614
1579
1621
1
SX+
SX-
PCB
ISS
AGND
DC16
-15V
ALL UNMARKED CAPACITORS: 100n X7R
ALL UNMARKED DIODES: BAT81
1 PAIR DECOUPLING CAPACITORS
FOR EACH OP-AMP - MUST BE
ELECTRICALLY CLOSE TO PINS
CCT
REV
2
2
2
2
REVISION HISTORY
A
B
C
D
1
G
2
Rev
D
Page 5 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
G
1
2
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 10–5: 401104-3 Analogue to Digital conversion – ADC 2
10
R10
1M0
GP
TP1J
TP1K
AGND
C7
100p
NPO
C8
100p
NPO
AGND
C9
100p
NPO
AGND
3
2
3
2
3
2
6
U16
OP27GP
+
-
6
U17
OP27GP
+
-
6
U18
OP27GP
+
-
6
U19
OP27GP
+
-
ED
BY
R14
39R
GP
R15
C11
100n
39R
GP
R16
39R
GP
C12
100n
R17
39R
GP
V+
CHK
BY
DC36
DC37
DC80
AGND
D9
D13
+15V
1
DC38
1u0
35VT
D15
U21
7805
I
O
3
AGND
O
DC39
1u0
35VT
3
DC41
+5V2
D12
I
U22
7905
-5V2
DC44
220n
D16
2
DC47
1u0
35VT
D11
AGND
D10
D14
-15V
AGND
R18
51R
GP
DC40
DC45
100u
10VE
DC46
220n
AGND
DC48
1u0
35VT
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 1b
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
7
23
8
21
3
4
26
25
28
27
6
1
24
L3
FROM SHT 2
D5V
DC43
1u0
35VT
VA+
APD
VD+
DGND
VL+
SPLIT
GROUND
PLANE
DGND
OCLKD
ICLKA
LEFT
SCLK
FSYNC
ICLKD
SDATA
SMODE
CMODE
ACAL
DCAL
DPD
AK5390
VA-
LGND
AGND
REF-
REF+
INL+
INLINR+
INR-
TSTO1
TSTO2
U20
DC42
BEAD
DC49
D5V
RP1F
1K
17
2
10
5
9
12
11
15
13
14
16
19
20
22
18
IAPD
IDPD
ICM
ISD2
ILR2
ISK2
IFS2
ICLKD
DGND
DGND
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 2a
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
11
U9E
1
DC50
2
U25B
12
4
RP3B
1K
RP3D
1K
U25A
74HCT04
D5V
IAPD
IDPD FROM SHT 2
ICLKD
ICM
U9F
10
13
DGND
3
1
RP3A
1K
1
2
3
4
RP3C
1K
1
2
3
4
U23
A1
K1
K2
A2
O1
O2
VCC
GND
GND
O1
O2
VCC
HCPL2430
U24
A1
K1
K2
A2
HCPL2430
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
Friday, January 05, 2001
Document Number
401104d3.DWG
+5V
DC51
GND
Sheet
SD2
LR2
+5V
GND
3
SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL DATA
TO CPU BOARD
+5V
DC52
GND
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 2b
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
Size
A3
Title
Date:
ANALOGUE TO DIGITAL CONVERSION - ADC #2
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(c) TSS (UK) Ltd., 1995
1
11
TP1B
TP1C
3
2
+15V
+15V
DC34
AGND
DC35
DATE
RPM
MI
DB
BB
-15V
ECR
NOs
22FEB95
11SEP95
17 OCT 00
05 Jan 01
1
2
1
4
R11
1M0
GP
2
R12
1M0
GP
3
AGND
C10
100p
NPO
DC32
DC33
V-
--614
1579
1621
3
5
PZ+
PZ-
PX+
PCB
ISS
PXR13
1M0
GP
DC30
DC31
-15V
1 PAIR DECOUPLING CAPACITORS
FOR EACH OP-AMP - MUST BE
ELECTRICALLY CLOSE TO PINS
CCT
REV
2
2
2
2
REVISION HISTORY
A
B
C
D
14
7
1
7
G
2
SK2
FS2
of
4
Rev
D
Page 6 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
G
1
10 – System Drawings
Figure 10–6: 401104-4 Analogue to Digital conversion – ADC 3
PY+
PY-
SY+
PCB
ISS
SY-
6
R19
1M0
GP
7
R20
1M0
GP
8
R21
1M0
GP
9
R22
1M0
GP
TP1F
TP1G
TP1H
TP1I
DC53
DC54
-15V
AGND
C13
100p
NPO
AGND
C14
100p
NPO
C15
100p
NPO
AGND
C16
100p
NPO
AGND
DC55
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
DC56
V-
1 PAIR DECOUPLING CAPACITORS
FOR EACH OP-AMP - MUST BE
ELECTRICALLY CLOSE TO PINS
CCT
REV
2
2
2
2
6
U26
OP27GP
+
-
6
U27
OP27GP
+
-
6
U28
OP27GP
+
-
6
U29
OP27GP
+
DATE
RPM
MI
DB
BB
ED
BY
-
+15V
+15V
DC57
AGND
DC58
ECR
NOs
22FEB95
11SEP95
17 OCT 00
05 Jan 01
-15V
--614
1579
1621
REVISION HISTORY
A
B
C
D
R23
39R
GP
R24
C17
100n
39R
GP
R25
39R
GP
C18
100n
R26
39R
GP
V+
CHK
BY
DC59
DC60
DC81
D22
1
DC61
1u0
35VT
D18
D23
O
3
O
O
O
R27
51R
GP
DC76
1u0
35VT
AGND
DC75
1u0
35VT
DC71
1u0
35VT
AGND
DC69
220n
DC68
100u
10VE
DC63
DC64
DC62
1u0
35VT
3
3
7
23
8
21
3
4
26
25
28
6
1
27
24
L4
APD
VD+
RP1G
1K
17
2
10
5
9
12
11
15
13
14
16
19
20
22
18
IAPD
IDPD
ICM
ISD3
ILR3
ISK3
IFS3
ICLKD
DGND
DGND
D5V
5
U25C
U25F
9
6
11
8
U25E
U25D
12
IAPD
IDPD
ICLKD
ICM
FROM SHT 2
13
RP3F
1K
RP3H
1K
10
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 2a
1
6
1
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
REGION 1c
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
7
1
3
4
1
2
RP3E
1K
D5V
RP3G
1K
1
2
3
4
U35
A1
K1
K2
A2
O1
O2
VCC
GND
GND
O1
O2
VCC
HCPL2430
U36
A1
K1
K2
A2
HCPL2430
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
+5V
DC77
GND
SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL DATA
TO CPU BOARD
+5V
DC78
GND
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 2b
TRACKS MUST NOT CHANGE
REGIONS UNNECCESSARILY.
SEPARATE GROUND PLANES
FOR REGIONS 1 & 2.
Size
A3
Friday, January 05, 2001
Document Number
401104d4.DWG
Title
Date:
Sheet
SD3
LR3
+5V
4
GND
ANALOGUE TO DIGITAL CONVERSION - ADC #3
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(c) TSS (UK) Ltd., 1995
1
8
FROM SHT 2
D5V
DC66
1u0
35VT
VA+
DGND
VL+
SPLIT
GROUND
PLANE
DGND
OCLKD
ICLKA
LEFT
SCLK
FSYNC
ICLKD
SDATA
SMODE
CMODE
ACAL
DCAL
DPD
AK5390
VA-
LGND
AGND
REF-
REF+
INL+
INLINR+
INR-
TSTO1
TSTO2
U30
DC65
BEAD
DC72
+12V
REGULATED SUPPLIES
TO PREAMPS
-12V
9
U31
7805
I
I
U34
7912
3
AGND
+5V1
D20
I
U33
7812
I
U32
7905
-5V1
DC67
220n
D24
2
2
DC74
1u0
35VT
DC73
1u0
35VT
1
DC70
1u0
35VT
D19
AGND
+15V
D17
D21
-15V
+15V
AGND
AGND
-15V
1
8
G
2
SK3
FS3
of
4
Rev
D
Page 7 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
G
1
G
1
G
2
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 10–7: 401103-1 Processor Board
2
2
2
2
3*
4
4
5**
6
PCB
ISS
LEEK
DETECTOR
PL10
1
2
3
MOLEX
5414-3
PL5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
T&B
PL1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LPWR
LEAK
GND
GND
/SD1IN
/LR1IN
/SK1IN
/FS1IN
/SD2IN
/LR2IN
/SK2IN
/FS2IN
/SD3IN
/LR3IN
/SK3IN
/FS3IN
GND
G0
G1
DPD
APD
CMODE
GND
TCLK0
GND
+5V
+15V
-15V
AGND
GND
P24V
PCOM
+5V
GND
+15V
AGND
-15V
TP9
VCC
VSS
TP10
TO CN5
ONLY
RPM
MI
TWT
GB
DB
DB
MOLEX
5414-8
TP8
SW
DB
GND
21FEB95
08SEP95
24SEP99
17APR00
BB
CHK
BY
---614
1423
1566
14 AUG 01
20APR00
16 OCT 00
ED
BY
1240
1579
DATE
1676
ECR
NOs
REVISION HISTORY
* Note issue 3 not used due
to part number errors
** Issue 5 Not Used (Addition of Assy
revision box & PLCC sockets removed).
CCT
REV
A
B
C
D
G
E
F
VDD
TP11
VEE
ADC INTERFACE
LPWR
LEAK
/SD1IN
/LR1IN
/SK1IN
/FS1IN
/SD2IN
/LR2IN
/SK2IN
/FS2IN
/SD3IN
/LR3IN
/SK3IN
/FS3IN
401103G4
+5V
+5V
R1
470R
D4
LED
GND
A[0..23]
D[0..31]
/INT1
/ADCEN
A[0..23]
D[0..31]
/INT1
/ADCEN
G0
G1
DPD
APD
CMODE
TCLK0
PROCESSOR CORE
A[0..23]
D[0..31]
/INT1
/ADCEN
G0
G1
DPD
APD
CMODE
TCLK0
401103G2
TxD1
RxD1
DTR1
TxD2
RxD2
TxD3
RxD3
TxD1
RxD1
DTR1
TxD2
RxD2
TxD3
RxD3
SHT
FUNCTION
comms
TxD1
RxD1
DTR1
TxD2
RxD2
TxD3
RxD3
401103G3
REF
PIN
FUNCTION
SHT
TESTPOINT LOCATIONS
PIN
REF
GND (DIGITAL)
RESET SWITCH
+5V
/RESET
GND
FS1 FRM SYNC
SK1 SHFT CLK
SD1 SER DATA
LR1 CHANNEL
LCLK1 SR LTCH
FS2 FRM SYNC
SK2 SHFT CLK
SD2 SER DATA
LR2 CHANNEL
LCLK2 SR LTCH
FS3 FRM SYNC
SK3 SHFT CLK
SD3 SER DATA
LR3 CHANNEL
LCLK3 SR LTCH
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP1
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
TP4
GND
TIMER 0
TIMER 1
XF0 FLAG
XF1 FLAG
H1 CPU STATUS
H3 CPU STATUS
32.768MHz CLK
/STRB STROBE
/RDY
READY
RWL (WRITE=0)
RAMCE ACTV HI
/BOOTCE EPROM
/E2CE E2PROM
/IOEN TO U13
/INT0
GND
/IACK CLR F/F
/RD3 RD CHN 3
/RD3 RD CHN 2
/RD3 RD CHN 1
/INT1 TO CPU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
GND
/GPOEN LATCH
G0 TO PREAMP
G1 TO PREAMP
DPD ADC CTRL
APD ADC CTRL
CMODE ADC CTRL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
A
B
C
D
E
F
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP2
TP5
TP5
TP5
TP5
TP5
TP5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
ISOL. GND - MAIN IO
ISOL. GND - AUX IO
TP6
TP6
TP6
TP6
TP6
TP6
TP6
3
3
DIGITAL GROUND
UART CLOCK CH 1
UART CLOCK CH 2
UART CLOCK CH 3
TP12
TP13
3
3
3
3
GND
/ZWR SLOW WR
/ZRD SLOW RD
/CSSCC2 SCC2
/CSSCC1 SCC1
/ADCEN
/ZRDY WAITS
TxD1 SER OUT
RxD1 SER IN
RxD2 SER IN
TxD2 SER OUT
TxD3 SER OUT
RxD3 SER IN
RxD4 NOT USED
TxD4 NOT USED
SCC CLOCK
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A
B
C
D
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
TP7
TP7
TP7
TP7
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
DIGITAL GROUND
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP3
TP8 - TP11
COMMS1
COMMS2
COMMS3
COMMS4
ITxD2
IRxD2
FGND
ITxD3
IRxD3
COMMS1
COMMS2
COMMS3
COMMS4
ITXD2
IRXD2
FGND
P24V
PCOM
ITXD3
IRXD3
FGND
P24V
PCOM
Assemble PCBs - 401103
Bare PCB
- 301077
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(C) TSS (UK) Ltd. 2001
Tuesday, August 14, 2001
Document Number
401103G1
Title
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
Size
A3
PROCESSOR BOARD
Date:
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
PL2
MOLEX
5414-4
PL3
MOLEX
5414-6
PL4
MOLEX
5414-6
Sheet
1
of
4
Rev
G
Page 8 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
10 – System Drawings
Figure 10–8: 401103-2 CPU Core
/INT1
2
2
2
2
3*
4
4
5**
6
PCB
ISS
80
79
78
77
76
75
73
72
68
67
64
63
62
60
58
56
55
54
53
52
50
48
47
46
45
44
43
41
39
38
34
31
108
111
110
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
DR0
CLKR0
FSR0
95
87
88
100
103
106
107
99
/RESET
CLK1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
DR0
CLKR0
FSR0
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
IACK
RESET
X2/CLKIN
X1
EMU0
EMU1
EMU2
TP2H
1
U3A
74ALS04
/RESET
U6
2
8
+5V
DS1232
SOIC
PB
TD
TOL
GND
14
13
12
11
15
/INT0
CLK1
VCC
ST
RST
RST
SCCCLK
ACLK
3
5
15
13
11
9
1.96608MHz
+5V
U3B
4
74ALS04
U3C
6
+5V
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
RWL
/RDY
/STRB
11
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
/STRB
/RDY
RWL
RWL
/STRB
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
29
28
27
26
25
23
22
21
20
18
16
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
5
2
1
130
129
PU21
/RDY
DX0
CLKX0
FSX0
U1
DC3
U1
DC4
6
5
7
U1
DC5
RP2
10k
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
U2
DC6
U5
RWL
STRB
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
RDYIN
IOEN
RAMCE
E2CE
BOOTCE
RDYOUT
RDY1D
RDY2D
TP2L
TP2N
DC7
+5V
RP1
22k
U4
12
13
14
15
19
16
17
/IOEN
RAMCE
/E2CE
/BOOTCE
/RDY
/RDY1
/RDY2
12 RAMCE
14 /E2CE
13 /BOOTCE
U5
DC9
15 /IOEN
PU21
PU23
PU24
PU25
EM0
EM1
EM2
DC8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ONLY FITTED
FOR DEVELOPMENT
APPLICATIONS.
SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL PORT
ADAPTOR
PL7
PIN 8 OMITTED
ONLY FITTED
FOR DEVELOPMENT
APPLICATIONS.
EMULATOR PORT
TP2O
TP2M
U3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
TP2K
TP2J
PL6
TP2I
460018
PU26
PU27
PU28
PU29
PU210
/RESET
/INT2
/INT3
MISC PULLUPS
GND
GND
+5V
TP2G
TP2F
TP2E
TP2D
TP2C
TP2B
TP2A
TCLK0
18
93
92
94
116
112
114
4
3
1
XF0
GND
PU23
PU24
XF1
TCLK1
2
118
127
XF0
XF1
TCLK0
TCLK1
H3
+5V
CLKR0
FSR0
DR0
+5V
/RESET
DX0
FSX0
CLKX0
H3
EM3
EM2
EM0
EM1
H1
TCLK0
120
122
H1
H3
EM3
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
TP2P
96
98
/RDY
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
81
82
123
1
ACLK
A
B
CLK
74HCT164
SOIC
CLR
ZRDY
90
89
U1
TMS320C31PQL
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
STRB
RDY
R/WL
HOLD
HOLDA
DX0
CLKX0
FSX0
H1
H3
EMU3
XF0
XF1
TCLK0
TCLK1
SHZ
MCB/MPL
CLK1
CLK2
3
TP1D
+5V
LK8
8
1
2
TP3P
7.864325MHz
U1
DC2
ALL UNSPECIFIED CAPACITORS ARE PHILIPS 1206 SIZE,
100nF 63V X7R; PART NUMBER 1206-2R-104-K9AB
9
U4
WATCHDOG DISABLE
(DEVT. USE ONLY)
ARTWORKED 1-2.
2
4
74ALS04
16
PU25
/RESET
+5V
DC1
10u
GND
U6
DC10
PU26
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
3
31
2
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
3
31
2
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
29
28
24
27
3
30
2
U8
12
13
9
10
U7
/STRB
RWL
RAMCE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
5C1008DJ25
U9
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
RWL
U13
RWL
IOEN
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
460025
U9
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
CE1
CE2
OE
WE
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
CE1
CE2
OE
WE
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
CE
OE
WE
8
29
24
22
30
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
RWL
GND
/STRB
RAMCE
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
/STRB
RAMCE
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
RAMCE
22
30
GND
RWL
24
29
/E2CE
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
RWL
/E2OE
13
14
15
18
19
20
21
22
31
3
1
2
15
4
/GPOEN
/ADCEN
/RDY1A
Q
Q
74ALS112
SOIC
J
CK
K
R
S
U15A
/RDY1
U11
DC15
6
5
U12
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
3
31
2
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
3
31
2
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
26
23
25
4
28
29
3
2
30
31
U13
DC17
U8
/STRB
RWL
RAMCE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
5C1008DJ25
U10
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
U14
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
CE1
CE2
OE
WE
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
CE
OE
O0
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
WE
OE
CE1
CE2
DC18
22
30
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
/STRB
RAMCE
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
GND
/STRB
RAMCE
24
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
RWL
22
30
GND
29
24
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
RWL
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
GND
/BOOTCE
GND
29
22
24
11
13
12
14
10
U16
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Q
Q
DC20
74ALS112
SOIC
J
CK
K
R
S
U15B
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
NC16
ZRD
ZWR
RDY
/ADCEN
TO SHT 4
1
H1
U15
DC19
GND
460020
CLK
RWL
NC3
CSPIT
CSSCC
NC6
NC7
NC8
RESET
EN
U14
VPP
/BOOTCE
5C1008DJ25
U12
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
R2
100R
/RESET
PU28
6
/GPOEN
/ADCEN
/CSSCC1
/CSSCC2
27C040-250DC
CLK2
RWL
PU29
/CSSCC1
/CSSCC2
74ALS20
SOIC
U16A
/RESET
4
5
1
2
/RDY1B
DC16
WAIT STATE GENERATOR - EACH STAGE ADDS 60ns
9
23
21
16
18
20
17
19
14
15
U3D
25
8
74ALS04
CSSCC1
CSSCC2
CSGPO
CSADC
NC16
NC18
NC20
RDY2
DC14
H1
U10
/RESET
PU27
DC13
5C1008DJ25
/BOOTCE
/E2CE
U11
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
28C256S
DC12
74ALS20
SOIC
U16B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
22
23
NOTE: U11 ACCESSED
ON DATA BITS 8-15
/IOEN
A0
A1
A2
A3
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
DELAYED RDY
REQUESTS
FROM U5
RDY2
/ZRDY
U7
DC11
7
9
/ZRD
/ZWR
U17
U18
DC22
7
D[0..31]
A[0..23]
/ZRD
/ZWR
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
41
40
39
37
1
2
44
3
43
4
42
5
38
7
8
9
6
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
38
41
40
39
37
1
2
44
3
43
4
42
5
23
/CSSCC2
5
6
TP3D
TP3E
TP3F
TP7B
TP7A
U17
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A /B
D /C
/RD
/WR
/CE
IEO
IEI
/IACK
/INT
PCLK
TP7C
UCLK2
31
30
32
29
24
25
26
27
34
33
12
11
19
20
21
22
16
13
15
14
GND
2 UCLK1
1
TXDA
/RTXCA
/TRXCA
RXDA
/SYNCA
/WREQA
/DTRA
/RTSA
/CTSA
/DCDA
/DCDB
/CTSB
/RTSB
/DTRB
/WREQB
/SYNCB
3
RXDB
/TRXCB
/RTXCB
TXDB
UCLK3
TxD1
RxD1
PU213
PU212
TxD2
RxD2
TxD3
RxD3
TP6E
TP3O
TP3N
PU216
1
Sheet
9
TP3H
TP3I
TxD1
8
RxD1
TP3K
DTR1
11
TP3J
2
TP3M
G0
G1
DPD
APD
CMODE
of
4
RxD3
TxD3
TP3L
TxD2
RxD2
10
12
13
PU215
15
12
11
19
20
21
22
14
SCC2 CH 2 NOT
USED - BROUGHT
TO TESTPOINT
ONLY.
16
13
15
14
4
Tuesday, August 14, 2001
Document Number
401103G2
TP6A
24
25
26
27
34
33
31
30
32
29
GND
TP6G
TP6D
G0
G1
DPD
APD
CMODE
R9
100R
TP6F
TP6C
RXDB
/TRXCB
/RTXCB
TXDB
/DCDB
/CTSB
/RTSB
/DTRB
/WREQB
/SYNCB
/SYNCA
/WREQA
/DTRA
/RTSA
/CTSA
/DCDA
TXDA
/RTXCA
/TRXCA
RXDA
Z85C3010VSC
TP7D
U18
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A /B
D /C
/RD
/WR
/CE
IEO
IEI
/IACK
/INT
PCLK
TP6B
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PU211
PU212
PU213
PU214
PU215
PU216
Z85C3010VSC
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
74ALS574
CLK
OC
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
U57
2
23
7
8
9
6
/ZRD
/ZWR
SCCCLK
/INT2
PU211
/CSSCC1
A0
A1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A0
A1
/GPOEN
SCCCLK
/INT3
PU214
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
4
/GPOEN
/CSSCC1
/ADCEN
11
1
/CSSCC2
TP3B
TP3C
+5V
RP3
10k
Size
A2
Title
Date:
PROCESSOR BOARD - CPU CORE
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(C) TSS (UK) Ltd. 2001
TP3A
2
3
1
/ZRD
TP3G
U55
DC23
GND
/ZWR
READY SIGNAL
FROM WAIT-STATE
LOGIC TO CPU
/ZRDY
DC21
5
124
125
126
GND
8
3
2
4
6
8
QA
QB
QC
QD
RCO
CHK
BY
GND
4
7
3
6
/INT0
/INT1
/INT2
/INT3
EM0
EM1
EM2
U2
Q
31.4573MHz
TP1C
2
GND
1
U56
A
B
C
D
ENP
ENT
CLK
LOAD
CLR
74HCT161
SOIC
ED
BY
DB
DB
1
TP1A
3
4
5
6
7
10
2
9
1
DATE
RPM
MI
TWT
GB
SW
DB
BB
1
TP1B
PU210
CLK2
/RESET
ECR
NOs
20APR00
16 OCT 00
21FEB95
08SEP95
24SEP99
17APR00
14 AUG 01
---614
1423
1566
1676
1240
1579
REVISION HISTORY
* Note issue 3 not used due
to part number errors
** Issue 5 Not Used (Addition of Assy
revision box & PLCC sockets removed).
CCT
REV
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
1
Rev
G
Page 9 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
16
6
15
24
32
33
40
49
59
65
66
74
83
91
97
104
105
115
121
131
132
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
3
4
17
19
30
35
36
37
42
51
57
61
69
70
71
84
85
86
101
102
109
113
117
119
128
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 10–9: 401103-3 Processor Board - Comms
TxD1
DTR1
RxD1
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 1
TxD2
TxD3
RxD2
RxD3
PRIMARY REGION
SCC2 CHANNEL 2
(?xD4) IS NOT USED
+5V
1
1
RP4A
1K
RP4B
1K
DC24
+5V
2
3
+5V
4
GND
DC25
100u
GND
ECR
NOs
20APR00
16 OCT 00
21FEB95
08SEP95
24SEP99
17APR00
DATE
BB
SW
DB
RPM
MI
TWT
GB
ED
BY
DB
DB
GND
+5V
DC42
100u
RP4C
GND
1
RP4D
1K
5
+5V
---614
1423
1566
14 AUG 01
1
1K
DC43
GND
1240
1579
CHK
BY
1676
REVISION HISTORY
not used due
errors
Used (Addition of Assy
PLCC sockets removed).
2
2
2
2
3*
4
4
5**
6
PCB
ISS
* Note issue 3
to part number
** Issue 5 Not
revision box &
CCT
REV
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
U19
A1
K1
K2
A2
VCC
O1
O2
7
6
8
5
R3
1K
1
2
3
4
+12V1
GND1
-12V1
IRX1A
ITX1
-12V1
1
1
2
+5V1
5
7
6
8
3
4
IRX1C
RXEN1
8
6
+5V1
5
I
O
3
U22
RXI
TXO
V+
RTC
VRXO
TXI
Pi-Filter
L9
O+
O-
I+
I-
GND
B
A
VCC
GND
75155
U23
RXO
REN
DEN
TXI
75176
U24
VCC
OUT
OE
GND
HPCL4200
U25
VCC
IN
GND
4200
8
5
7
+5V1
232RX
232TX
+12V1
8
422B
422A
6
7
6
GND1
FGND
TX
T+
RED LED
C1
1n
D2
+12V1
RED LED
D1
RX
5
1
2
3
4
TP13
GND2
DC35
R-P SENSOR
R16
10k
+12V2
ALTIMETER
R15
10k
+12V2
DC41
1u
+5V2
DC34
HPCL4100
4100
ITXD1
1
GND2
COMMS FROM ALTIMETER
AND R-P SENSOR
(OPTIONS)
'176
5
7
6
8
5
7
6
U30
78L05
GND1
DC33
GND1
RXEN1
ITXD1
IRX1B
RXEN1
+5V1
GND1
2430
DC40
2u2
RXI
TXO
8
ONE PAIR FOR
EACH 75155
RXI
TXO
V+
RXO
TXI
RTC
75155D
U32
RTC
VRXO
TXI
75155D
GND
V+
GND
V-
U31
DC38
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
DC39
DC28
C' LOOP
ITXD1
RXEN1
TP12
GND1
3
2
LK1
2
4
6
8
+5V1
DC32
4
1
3
5
7
DC26
3
DC29
O
U26
LM340-5
I
DC36
DC37
-12V2
GND2
-12V2
GND2
DC31
1u
GND1
GND1
R4
1K
+5V2
1
DC27
75155
TTXD2
TTXD3
DC30
2u2
8
6
5
4
+12V1
GND1
7
6
GND2
+12V2
GND2
-12V2
5
R8
1K
6
5
4
R7
1K
TRXD3
TRXD2
3
4
1
2
OP+
OPC
OP-
K2
A2
A1
K1
GND
HCPL2430
U20
VCC
O1
O2
GND
HCPL2430
NMH 0512S
IP+
IPNO PIN
U21
C3
0.1uF
NMH 0512S
OP+
OPC
OP-
O1
O2
VCC
K2
A2
A1
K1
GND
HCPL2430
GND
O1
O2
VCC
U29
HCPL2430
K2
A2
A1
K1
U28
IP+
IPNO PIN
U27
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 3
TRACKS MUST NOT CROSS
INTO OR OUT OF THIS
REGION. WITH THE EXCEPTION
OF EMC EARTH
EMC Earth Connect to
Mounting holes
R5
5k6
D3
232TX
422A
R+
232RX
422B
RT+
GND1
T+
RT-
T-
GND1
Q1
BD131
1
3
5
7
1
3
5
7
1
3
5
7
1
3
5
7
LK2
LK3
LK4
LK5
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
Pi-Filter
L1
Pi-filter
L2
Pi-Filter
L3
Pi-filter
L4
LAYOUT INFORMATION:
REGION 2
COMMS1
COMMS2
232
422
4CL
2CL
TO PRIMARY
COMMS
HEADER
COMMS3
COMMS4
LINK POS
TXDATA
RS232
1-2
COMMON
BUS 'B'
BUS 'A'
RS422
(& 485)
3-4
TX-
TX+
RX-
RX+
4 WIRE
C' LOOP
5-6
OPEN CCT
OPEN CCT
LOOP -
LOOP +
2 WIRE
C' LOOP
7-8
4
Rev
G
IRXD3
IRXD2
EMC Earth
Connect to
Mounting holes
MODE
RXDATA
COMMON
R6
56R
COMMS1
COMMON
TRACKS MUST NOT CROSS
INTO OR OUT OF THIS
REGION. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF EMC
EARTH
COMMS2
COMMON
-12V1
COMMS3
Pi-Filter
L6
Pi-Filter
L8
3
NB: ALL 5 LINKS MUST BE SET TO THE SAME POSITION
ITXD2
ITXD3
Sheet
of
COMMS4
Pi-Filter
L5
Pi-Filter
L7
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
(C) TSS (UK) Ltd. 2001
Tuesday, August 14, 2001
Document Number
401103G3
Title
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
Size
A3
PROCESSOR BOARD - COMMS
Date:
Page 10 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
G
2
G
2
10 – System Drawings
Figure 10–10: 401103-4 Processor Board - ADC Interface
1
U33A
2
74ALS04
PU41
FS1
2
3
PU44
FS2
ED
BY
DB
DB
4
12
8
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
U34A
P
CK
D
R
Q
Q
74HCT74
U33B
3
Q
Q
PU42
U41A
P
CK
D
R
74HCT74
U33F
13
Q
Q
PU45
U46A
P
CK
D
R
74HCT74
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
PU48
U40D
9
PU414
+5V
RP8
4k7
5
6
5
6
5
6
10
11
12
13
4
3
2
1
10
11
12
13
4
3
2
1
10
11
12
13
5
Q
Q
U35A
6
5
8
9
U33C
6
U34B
P
CK
D
R
Q
Q
74HCT74
P
CK
D
R
Q
Q
74ALS04
U40A
2
74HCT74
1
U41B
P
CK
D
R
Q
Q
74HCT74
U42A
P
CK
D
R
74HCT74
Q
Q
SD1
SD2
4
9
9
U48
SER
U33D
8
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
QH'
QH'
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
U40F
12
QH'
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
U40B
4
74LS595
RCLK
G
SRCLK
SRCLR
SER
U36
TP4D
PU43
14
11
10
12
13
/RD1
LCLK1
SK1
3
13
74LS595
RCLK
G
SRCLK
SRCLR
SER
U43
TP4I
PU46
PU49
TP4N
/RD2
LCLK2
SK2
12
13
14
6
5
11
10
14
9
SD3
14
SRCLK
SRCLR
RCLK
G
74LS595
DC45
U34
VCC
GND
DC46
U35
DR1
/RD1
DR2
/RD2
DR3
/RD3
+5V
SD1
LR1
SK1
FS1
SD2
LR2
SK2
FS2
SD3
LR3
SK3
FS3
GND
GND
PL8
RESERVED FOR
FUTURE DEVELOPMENT
/RD3
LCLK3
SK3
12
13
9
5
6
DC44
11
10
U33
+5V
8
+5V
GND
8
U40E
10
U46B
11
P
CK
D
R
Q
Q
74HCT74
U47A
P
CK
D
R
74HCT74
1
4
3
2
1
TP4A
1
11
U39D
74HCT125
PU41
PU42
PU43
PU44
PU45
PU46
PU47
PU48
TP5A
GND
LR1
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
LR2
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
PL8
LR3
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
T&B
U36
DC47
PU43
PU46
PU49
U37
DC48
U38
14
11
10
12
13
U37
SER
SRCLK
SRCLR
RCLK
G
74LS595
RCLK
G
SRCLK
SRCLR
SER
U44
/RD1
LCLK1
SK1
14
11
10
12
13
74LS595
RCLK
G
SRCLK
SRCLR
SER
U49
/RD2
LCLK2
SK2
14
11
10
12
13
DC50
U39
74LS595
/RD3
LCLK3
SK3
DC49
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
QH'
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
QH'
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
QH'
U40
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
DC51
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
U41
DC52
PU43
PU46
PU49
U42
DC53
14
11
10
12
13
AD[0..18]
U38
SER
SRCLK
SRCLR
RCLK
G
74LS595
AD[0..18]
RCLK
G
SRCLK
SRCLR
SER
U45
/RD1
LCLK1
14
11
10
12
13
74LS595
AD[0..18]
RCLK
G
SRCLK
SRCLR
SER
U50
/RD2
LCLK2
14
11
10
12
13
DC55
U44
74LS595
/RD3
LCLK3
LPWR
LEAK
U43
DC54
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
QH'
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
QH'
QA
QB
QC
QD
QE
QF
QG
QH
QH'
R10
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
AD16
AD17
AD16
AD17
AD16
AD17
DC57
U46
C2
Not fitted
R11
Not Fitted
Not Fitted
U45
DC56
U47
6
PU42
LCLK1
/IACK
11
PU45
LCLK2
/IACK
16
PU48
LCLK3
/IACK
+5V
2
3
R12
Not Fitted
GND
TP4F
TP4K
TP4P
+
-
DC59
U48
R14
Not Fitted
DC58
5
10
11
12
13
10
10
11
12
13
15
10
11
12
13
R13
2
TP4E
U35B
P
CK
D
R
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
3
1
U39A
74HCT125
3
9
8
5
AD18
LK6A
2
LK6B
4
AD18
LK6C
6
LK6D
8
DR1
DR2
/RD2
DR3
LK6F
LK6E
10
7
9
11
/RD3
AD18
9
8
12
U39C
74HCT125
8
8
9
U39B
74HCT125
6
TP4J
74HCT74
5
U42B
P
CK
D
R
TP4O
74HCT74
9
U47B
P
CK
D
R
DC63
U52
DC64
U53
DEFAULTS
300
1200
2400
9600
SELECT BAUD RATE /
DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
(ONLY READ AT RESET)
DC62
U51
LOW = LEAK
DETECTED
D5
Not Fitted
DC61
U50
74HCT74
Not fitted
U59
Not Fitted
6
U49
DC60
1
3
5
7
9
GND
TP5B
TP5C
+5V
RP5
47k
+5V
2
4
6
8
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RP6
47k
+5V
RP7
47k
LK7
DC65
U54
TP5D
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
UNUSED ADDRESS
BUS BITS -
1
2
13
4
5
6
7
DR1
DR2
DR3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
19
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
19
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
U51A
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
U52A
U54
U55
A
B
G
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
74HCT139
74HCT10
U53
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
G1
G2
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
74ALS541
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
G1
G2
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
74ALS541
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
G1
G2
74ALS541
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
74ALS541
G1
G2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
U58
1+5V
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
2
3
1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
/ADCEN
TP5F
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
A0
A1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
12
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
BIT:
33222222222211111111110000000000
10987654321098765432109876543210
L111BBBBDDabcPxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
L111BBBBDDabcPyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
L111BBBBDDabcPzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz
L111BBBBDDabc1111111111111111111
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
TSS 350 CABLE SURVEY SYSTEM
Tuesday, August 14, 2001
Document Number
401103G4
Sheet
PROCESSOR BOARD - ADC INTERFACE
Date:
Size
A2
Title
Copyright TSS (UK) Ltd, 2001
R / W
ADC PORT MAPPING:
/ADCEN
READ
READ
READ
READ
DC67
1
19
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AD16
AD17
AD18
DR1
DR2
DR3
AD8
AD9
AD10
AD11
AD12
AD13
AD14
AD15
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
/RD1
/RD2
/RD3
/IACK
SHOWN FOR
OrCad DESIGN
CHECKER.
TP5E
RP11
4k7
AD16
AD17
AD18
PU49
PU410
PU411
PU412
PU413
DC66
U55
BASE ADDRESS + 0
BASE ADDRESS + 1
BASE ADDRESS + 2
BASE ADDRESS + 3
LOCATION
3
/LR1IN
/SD1IN
+5V
TP4B
TP4C
U33E
10
7
8
PU47
FS3
RPM
MI
TWT
GB
6
2
3
4
5
RP9A
47k
11
TP4G
TP4H
U40C
6
12
SW
DB
4
/FS1IN
/SK1IN
/FS2IN
/LR2IN
/SD2IN
+5V
6
7
8
9
RP9B
47k
5
TP4L
13
12
11
10
9
6
DATE
BB
8
21FEB95
08SEP95
24SEP99
17APR00
1
1
1
4
10
/SK2IN
/LR3IN
/SD3IN
+5V
2
3
4
5
RP10A
47k
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
TP4M
U51B
A
B
G
74HCT139
U52B
U52C
74HCT10
20APR00
16 OCT 00
2
1
/FS3IN
/SK3IN
14
13
15
3
4
5
9
10
11
74HCT10
ECR
NOs
14 AUG 01
REVISION HISTORY
---614
1423
1566
CHK
BY
1676
1240
1579
5
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
+5V
PU414
PU413
PU412
PU411
6
7
8
9
RP10B
47k
PCB
ISS
2
2
2
2
3*
4
4
5**
6
7
4
1
1
1
* Note issue 3 not used due
to part number errors
** Issue 5 Not Used (Addition of Assy
revision box & PLCC sockets removed).
CCT
REV
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
13
4
A[0..23]
/ADCEN
/INT1
D[0..31]
of
4
Rev
G
Page 11 of 14
© TSS (International) Ltd
DPN 402197
1
1
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 10–11: 490221 350CE Cable Survey System Assembly (110V)
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 14
10 – System Drawings
Figure 10–12: B930476 350CE 3-axis coil cable assembly
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 14
350 Cable Survey System
Figure 10–13: B930473 ROV Tail Assembly
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 14 of 14
A – Operating Theory
A OPERATING THEORY
The 350 System locates a target by:
1. Detecting the alternating magnetic fields associated with tone currents injected
onto the cable.
2. Isolating the tone frequency from background noise.
3. Calculating the position of the target cable from the relative strengths of the signals on each channel.
This appendix describes these processes.
A.1 Electromagnetic Fields
Page 2
Magnetic fields surround any current-carrying conductor. These must be alternating
fields produced by a tone current so that the 350 System can detect them.
A.2 Field Detection
Page 2
The System uses an array of sensitive coils on the ROV to detect the alternating magnetic fields from the target cable.
A.3 Signal Isolation
Page 3
The 350 System receives signals across a wide band of frequencies. These include
noise together with the desired tone frequency. The System uses powerful signal
processing techniques to reduce or eliminate background noise.
A.4 Calculation
Page 4
Combinations of signals on the six channels allow the 350 System to deliver measurements of target co-ordinates, forward search range, and the angle of skew.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
A.1 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
The 350 System uses an array of sensing coils to detect the presence of alternating
magnetic fields and applies complex and powerful signal-processing techniques to
locate the origin of these magnetic fields.
Alternating magnetic fields exist around any conductor that carries an alternating current and are of a strength that varies directly with the instantaneous magnitude of the
current.
Figure A–1: Lines of magnetic flux
Figure A–1 shows the situation when a conductor carries a current. In this example,
the conductor appears in cross-section with conventional current flow rising upwards
out of the page. As the current begins to flow, lines of magnetic flux expand concentrically from the centre of the conductor with their polarity in an anti-clockwise direction
as shown. The strength of the flux varies inversely with distance from the conductor.
When the amplitude of current varies, the flux lines will expand or collapse simultaneously. The flux lines will reverse polarity when the current changes direction.
A.2 FIELD DETECTION
Each sensing coil of the 350 System consists of a very large number of turns of fine
copper wire wound around a ferrous metal core. The continuously changing magnetic
fields that exist around a tone-carrying conductor act upon the sensing coils and
induce in them an alternating voltage v. This voltage varies in magnitude according to
the following relationships:
v ∝ 1--d
v∝f
v∝i
Where d = distance from the conductor to the sensing coil
f = frequency of current in the conductor
i = magnitude of current in the conductor
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 10
A – Operating Theory
A.3 SIGNAL ISOLATION
Marine survey environments suffer from significant levels of background noise produced by other electrical systems on board the ROV. The 350 System must remove
this noise from the coil signals before it can perform meaningful calculations.
This noise reduction process involves many stages, including:
1. BAND-PASS FILTERING:
Signals received by the coils may be extremely weak – possibly less than 5µV in
amplitude. Each of the six windings in the coil array therefore includes a precision
pre-amplifier and filter board to apply amplification and signal conditioning before it
transmits the signals to the relatively noisy environment on board the ROV. The preamplifier can vary its overall gain automatically according to circumstances.
An additional function of the pre-amplifier board is to apply high-pass and low-pass filtering. This function limits the pass-band of signals that arrive at the SEP to between
7.2Hz and 300Hz.
2. Frequency spectrum analysis
The SEP converts the analogue signals supplied by the coils to an 18-bit digital format for processing by the digital signal processor (DSP). Figure A–2 shows a simplified block diagram of the signal path for three of the six channels in the 350 System.
Figure A–2: Simplified signal path
The SEP samples the supplied signals approximately 1000 times per second and
uses powerful signal processing techniques to determine the spectrum of received
frequencies.
After processing the signals in this way, the SEP divides the entire received spectrum
into narrow ‘windows’ as shown in Figure A–3. The System stores the instantaneous
signal amplitude for each of these ‘windows’ in a series of memory locations.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
Relative
amplitude
Figure A–3: Frequency ‘windows’
0
10
20
30
40
50
Frequency (Hz)
60
70
80
90
100
This process isolates the various frequency components in a signal very effectively so
that the System can distinguish the tone frequency easily from among the background noise. The SDC display software provides a Frequency Spectrum feature similar to Figure A–3, with the tone frequency identified as a solid red bar. The example
in Figure A–3 shows the tone frequency at 33Hz.
See sub-section 6.2.1.4 for a more detailed description of the complete Frequency
Spectrum display.
A.4 CALCULATION
By using an array of two coil triads, the 350 System avoids potential sources of measurement error caused by changes in the amplitude of the tone signal. Calculations
performed by the 350 System provide three modes of operation:
1. Survey mode:
The SDC displays the vertical range to target and the lateral offset of the target
relative to the centre of the coil array. If the System receives altitude information or
you have specified a fixed coil height, this mode can also supply measurements of
altitude and target depth of cover.
See sub-section 6.2.1.2 for a full description of the Run Display screen.
2. Forward Search mode:
The SDC can display an estimate of the range to a tone-carrying cable that lies
along an intersecting course ahead of the ROV. This facility allows you to use the
350 System to conduct a search for a target in the survey area.
See sub-section 6.2.1.3 for a full description of the Forward Search screen.
3. Skew Measurement mode:
The SDC displays and transmits the angle of skew measured between the track of
the target and the ROV heading. Ideally, there should be no angle of skew present
during a survey.
The SDC displays all measurements relative to the ROV. They might therefore contain errors if you operate the ROV with some angle of roll or pitch.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 10
A – Operating Theory
You may pass measurements made using any available mode to an external data
logger for subsequent analysis.
See Sections 5 and 6 for a description of the SDC software. Refer to Section 7 for
instructions to use the 350 System during a survey.
A.4.1 Survey Mode
To measure the target co-ordinates (vertical range and lateral offset), the 350 System
uses signals from only the vertical and the lateral sensing coils in each coil triad.
Given a known frequency and magnitude of current in the conductor, the amplitude of
signal voltage delivered by each coil winding will depend upon the relative angle
between the coil and the conductor.
Figure A–4: The effect of incident angle on coil response
Figure A–4 shows the cross-section of a conductor carrying an alternating current
that has a constant peak amplitude and frequency.
Figure A–5: Coil response as incident angle varies
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
Figure A–5 shows the relationship that exists between the signal voltage v received
by the coil in Figure A–4 and the angle φ between the coil and the conductor:
v ∝ cos φ
❐
There will be no output (a null condition) when the conductor lies along the major
axis of the sensing coil (φ = 90° or φ = 270°).
❐
There will be maximum output when the conductor is on a line perpendicular to
the major axis (φ = 0° or φ = 180°).
❐
In all other conditions the coil output will be at some intermediate value between
maximum and zero as defined in Figure A–5.
The 350 System uses two coils arranged at right angles to extend the coverage
through a full 360°. By comparing the relative outputs from the two coils, the System
can determine the angle between the centre of the coil pair and the target as shown in
Figure A–6.
Figure A–6: Determination of relative angle using two coil voltages
In Figure A–6 the two independent windings of the coil assembly supply signal voltages vx (lateral coil) and vz (vertical coil). The System uses these to derive the angle
φ between the coil assembly and the conductor:
v
tan φ = ----x
vz
Since TSS calibrates and matches the coil windings during manufacture, any
changes to the tone frequency or current will have an equal effect on all coils. The
ratio of their output voltages (and therefore the evaluation of φ) will therefore remain
constant.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 10
A – Operating Theory
Figure A–7: Target location using two coil pairs
The 350 System uses an array of two coil pairs to determine the position of the target
cable. Figure A–7 shows this situation.
The SEP measures the strength of signals simultaneously on each of the four channels vx1/vz1 and vx2/vz2 and determines the target location by triangulation. The SEP
extracts the co-ordinates for lateral offset and vertical range, and transmits these
through the umbilical to the SDC.
A.4.2 Forward Search Mode
If the 350 System receives input from an altimeter, it can use this information to estimate the range to a tone-carrying cable that lies along an intersecting course ahead
of the ROV.
You may find this facility useful if you are searching for a target in the survey area.
You may use the display to steer the ROV towards the expected position of the target
at a near-perpendicular angle and then switch to the run mode to steer a course along
the target.
Figure A–8: Forward Range Calculation
When operating in the Forward Search mode, the 350 System uses signals from the
vertical and the fore-aft coils.
Signals from the relevant coil pair allow the 350 System to determine the search
angle φ to the target cable in the same way as described in sub-section A.4.1 above.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
The System then uses this information, together with the measured altitude of the
ROV, to estimate the forward range:
Altitude
Forward range ≅ ------------------tan φ
It is important to note that this range is an estimate only. Factors that affect the accuracy of this estimate are:
❐
The flatness of the seabed topography.
The calculation assumes that the height of the coils relative to the target cable is
the same as the altitude measured by the altimeter. Errors caused by uneven seabed topography are likely to be larger at greater forward ranges. The accuracy of
the estimate will degrade further with a target buried beneath the seabed.
❐
Operating the ROV with pitch.
Any angle of pitch will affect the forward search angle φ directly. The magnitude of
errors caused by angles of pitch increases rapidly with forward range.
A.4.3 Skew Measurement
The Run Display screen includes a graphical element that shows the angle of skew
between the ROV and the target cable (see sub-section 6.2.1.2 for further details of
this display feature). The System uses the lateral and the fore-aft coils on one side of
the array to measure skew.
Figure A–9 shows a survey ROV above the target cable. A small angle of skew exists
between the target and the ROV.
The 350 System measures the target co-ordinates as explained in sub-section A.4.1
above. These measurements retain the specified accuracy for that part of the target
directly between the two coil triads.
Figure A–9: Vehicle following target with skew angle
The example of Fig A–10 shows the target with a skew
angle θ and the output voltages from the lateral coil (vx)
and the fore-aft coil (vy) in the port coil triad.
Signal voltages supplied by the coil will be at a maximum
with the major axis of the coil perpendicular to the target.
A coil lying parallel to the course of the target will give a
very weak output. The peak amplitude of output voltage
will vary with the sine of the relative angle between the
major axis of the coil and the target cable.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 10
A – Operating Theory
Figure A–10: Skew angle measurement
Because of this relationship, the System can determine
the angle of skew θ:
v
θ = atan ----y
vx
The skew measurement method described does not
require you to locate the coil triad directly over the target
cable. It can work to the specified accuracy over a considerable swath range.
The convention used by the 350 System is to define positive skew with the ROV rotated clockwise relative to the
target.
The SDC displays measurements of skew only with the
System operating in the Survey mode.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 10
B – Options
B OPTIONS
The description throughout the main part of this Manual relates to the standard 350
Cable Survey System. Such a System provides all the facilities you will need to survey a target lying on or buried beneath the seabed.
For some applications, the 350 System may be more effective if you specify it with
one or more of the available options.
This appendix describes the options that TSS (International) Ltd can supply for use
with the 350 Cable Survey System:
❐
Combined ‘Dualtrack’ installation with a TSS 350 System
❐
Engineer training
B.1 DualTrack System
Page 2
To provide a survey system that has greater flexibility, the 350 System can be connected to a TSS (International) Ltd 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System. Combined
operation of the two Systems extends the range of applications for which either System can be used.
B.2 Training
Page 11
TSS (International) Ltd offers comprehensive operator and engineer training for the
350 Cable Survey System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 12
350 Cable Survey System
B.1 DUALTRACK SYSTEM
CAUTION
You might cause permanent damage to the sub-sea installations of the 440 or the 350
System if you operate them from an incorrect electrical supply voltage.
The standard sub-sea components of both Systems operate from a nominal 110V AC
electrical supply. Both Systems are available with the option to operate from a nominal
240V AC electrical supply. When you interconnect the 440 and the 350 Systems within
a Dualtrack installation you must operate both from the same electrical supply.
Throughout this sub-section, ‘the 440 Manual’ refers to the TSS (International) Ltd
440 Pipe and Cable Survey System Manual (TSS document P/N 402196 check).
This part of Appendix B describes the features of a TSS (International) Ltd ‘Dualtrack’
System that combines the 440 and the 350 Survey Systems on board an ROV. It
includes all information specific to a Dualtrack installation and provides cross references that help you locate more detailed information in the relevant product Manual.
You must consider the Manuals for the TSS 440 and the 350 Systems valid in all
respects except for those areas listed in sub-section B.1.2 below. TSS recommends
that all personnel who will install, use and maintain the equipment should read and
thoroughly understand the 350 System Manual and the 440 Manual.
B.1.1 The Equipment
The Dualtrack equipment described in this sub-section consists of the following:
❐
Sub-sea components of a TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
❐
Sub-sea components of a TSS 440 Pipe and Cable Survey System.
❐
A single SDC to provide configuration, control and communications functions for
both sets of sub-sea components.
❐
Product Manuals, interconnection cables and mounting components for all three
sub-sea electronics pods.
The 350 requires to have the latest firmware (version 3.7 or later) EPROM. This can be
confirmed in the terminal mode of DeepView for Windows, when the System is initiated
a banner is displayed that will identify the version number.
TSS (International) Ltd supplies the System with Microsoft Windows 2000 and the
DeepView for Windows graphical display software already installed and configured to
run automatically when you power-on the SDC. DeepView for Windows can operate
in all modes necessary to use the Dualtrack System.
The sub-sea components and the SDC supplied with the Dualtrack System are
exactly as described in the relevant parts of the 350 System Manual and the 440
Manual, except for those differences listed in sub-section B.1.2 below.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 12
B – Options
B.1.2 The Differences
Note the following important issues when you install the Dualtrack System:
1 Scope of Delivery
Sub-section B.1.3 lists the standard items supplied with the Dualtrack System.
2 Physical installation
Refer to sub-section 3.2 of this Manual for instructions to install the sub-sea components of the TSS 350 System.
Refer to Section 3 of the 440 Manual for instructions to install the sub-sea components of the 440 System.
You must take special precautions regarding the placement of the search coils when
you install the Dualtrack System on board an ROV.
Sub-section B.1.4 describes the special precautions you must make when you install
the Dualtrack System.
3 Electrical connection
To make the most efficient use of the ROV umbilical, the Dualtrack System uses only
two wires for all communications between the surface and the sub-sea installations.
See sub-section B.1.5 for details of the special electrical connection requirements
necessary to support this communication arrangement.
Where necessary, you may use 4-wire or RS232 communications instead.
Note that, in a Dualtrack System, you must connect the altimeter only to the ALTIMETER port of the 440 SEP, or to an SDC serial port. Do not connect the altimeter to
the 350 SEP.
4 Operation
In a Dualtrack installation, you cannot operate the 440 and the 350 Systems simultaneously.
DeepView for Windows allows you to switch between the 440 and the 350 operating
mode easily and quickly. The Run Window and its status bar will show the current
operating mode.
5 Power requirement
Sub-section B.1.6 includes details of the power supply requirements for the sub-sea
components of the Dualtrack System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 12
350 Cable Survey System
B.1.3 Scope of Delivery
Dualtrack includes the following major sub-assemblies:
Figure B–1: Surface Display Computer
Figure B–2: Sub-sea components of the TSS 350 System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 12
B – Options
Figure B–3: Sub-sea components of the TSS 440 System
Table B–1: Components of the Dualtrack System
Item
Description
Refer to Figure B–1:
G
Surface Display Computer (SDC) pre-loaded with Microsoft Windows™ 2000 and the DeepView for Windows
display software.
H
Retractable keyboard/ trackpad combination.
I
Modular PC console.
J
Modular 15” LCD display.
Refer to Figure B–2:
K
Sub-sea Electronics Pod (350 SEP) for the TSS 350 Cable Survey System.
L
Two connection cables with waterproof connectors for the port and the starboard coil triads.
M
Port and starboard coil triads.
N
TSS 440-to-350 link cable (TSS P/N 601814). The cable is 2.5 metres long and has waterproof connectors at
both ends.
Refer to Figure B–3:
O
Sub-sea Power Supply Pod (440 PSU) for the 350 Cable Survey System.
P
Sub-sea Electronics Pod (440 SEP) for the 350 Cable Survey System.
Q
Coil array comprising three TSS search-coils.
R
Three connection cables with waterproof connectors for the array of search-coils.
S
Sub-sea altimeter with connection cable and waterproof connector. This altimeter provides information for use
by the entire Dualtrack System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 12
350 Cable Survey System
Also included with the Dualtrack System but not shown are:
❐
❐
Trackball for use with the SDC and the DeepView for Windows software.
TSS 350 Cable Survey System Manual – TSS P/N 402196 current issue.
❐
TSS 440 Cable Survey System Manual – TSS P/N 402197 current issue.
❐
Mounting components for the coil triads of the 350 System (see Section 3.2.2 of
this Manual for details).
❐
Mounting components for the search coils of the 440 System (see Section 3 of the
440 Manual for details).
❐
Mounting components for all three electronics housings of the Dualtrack System.
B.1.4 Physical Installation
B.1.4.1 Search-coils
Follow the instructions in sub-section 3.2.2 of this Manual to install the mounting bar
and coil triads of the 350 System.
Follow the instructions included in sub-section 3.2.2 of the 440 Manual to install the
mounting frame and the coil array of the TSS 440 System.
CAUTION
With drive current applied to the coils of the 440 System, large induced voltages can
appear across the coils of the 350 System. Later versions of the 350 search coils,
stamped with the letters ‘DT’ on the end cap, include diodes to protect them from damage caused by these induced voltages.
If your System includes coils that have no diode protection, you should ensure that
there is a clearance of more than 0.75 metres between the coils of the 350 System and
the coils of the 440 System. Contact TSS (International) Ltd for advice if necessary.
B.1.4.2 Sub-sea Pods
The Dualtrack System includes three sub-sea pods:
❐
The PSU for the 440 System.
❐
The SEP for the 440 System.
❐
The SEP for the 350 System.
Follow the instructions in section 3.2 of the 440 Manual to install the 440 SEP and
440 PSU.
Follow the instructions included in sub-section 3.2.1 of this Manual to install the 350
SEP.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 12
B – Options
B.1.5 Electrical Connection
It is very important that you should interconnect the sub-sea components exactly as
described in Figure B–4 and the instructions below.
IMPORTANT
If the Dualtrack System is an upgrade to an existing 440 System, you must open the
440 SEP and set it to use RS232 communications. Refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 of the
440 Manual for instructions to change the communication method used by the 440
SEP.
Figure B–4: Electrical interconnection of sub-sea components
350 Sub-sea Components
POWER / COMMS
connector
Power / Comms
cable
AUX OUTPUT
connector
440-to-350 Link Cable
Length 2.5m
TSS P/N 601814
440 Sub-sea Components
Sub-sea altimeter
must be connected to the
Altimeter port of the 440 SEP
CAUTION
To avoid damage to either of the SEPs, make certain that you fit the blanking plugs
supplied by TSS (International) Ltd to any unused ports.
Failure to take this precaution might allow water to penetrate the SEP housings, following which total circuit failure will occur.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 12
350 Cable Survey System
Connect the TSS 440 sub-sea components:
1. Complete the physical installation of the 440 search-coils as described in sub-section 3.2.2 of the 440 Manual. Route the coil connection cables to the correct ports
on the 440 SEP. Use plastic cable clips to secure the cables to the fixed framework of the ROV.
2. Install the altimeter near the centre of the 440 search-coil array as described in
sub-section 3.2.3 of this Manual. Route the cable from the altimeter to the 440
SEP and follow the instructions in sub-section 4.1.5.1 of this Manual to connect it.
Use plastic cable clips to secure the cable to the ROV frame.
IMPORTANT
The Dualtrack System uses one altimeter only. You must connect the altimeter to the
ALTIMETER port on the 440 SEP, or to an SDC serial port.
If you connect the altimeter to the ALTIMETER port of the 350 SEP the Dualtrack System will not operate correctly.
3. Connect the 440 SEP to its PSU as described in its Manual.
Connect the TSS 350 sub-sea components:
4. Complete the physical installation of the 350 coil triads as described in sub-section 3.2.2 of the 350 Manual. Route the coil connection cables to the correct ports
on the 350 SEP. Use plastic cable clips to secure the cables to the ROV framework.
5. Connect the 350 SEP to the ROV electrical supply by following the instructions in
sub-section 4.2.1 of this Manual.
CAUTION
You might cause permanent damage to the sub-sea installations of the 440 or the 350
System if you operate them from an incorrect electrical supply.
The standard sub-sea components of both Systems operate from a nominal 110V AC
electrical supply. Optionally, both Systems are available for operation from a nominal
240V AC electrical supply.
When you interconnect the 350 and the 350 Systems within a Dualtrack installation,
you must operate both Systems from the same electrical supply.
6. Connect the communications conductors of the 350 Power/Comms cable to the
ROV umbilical. Note that the Dualtrack System would normally use 2-wire currentloop communications to the SDC to reduce the demand for twisted pairs in the
umbilical. However, where necessary, you may use 4-wire or RS232 communications instead. Refer to Tables 4–4, 4–5 and 4–6 in this Manual for appropriate
connection details.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 12
B – Options
Connect the 350 System to the 440 System:
7. Use the 440-to-350 Link Cable (TSS P/N 601814) to connect the 8-way ‘Power/
Comms’ connector on the 440 PSU to the AUX OUTPUT port on the 350 SEP.
This link uses RS232 communications at 9600 baud.
Note that the connectors at each end of the cable are of a different design. You
cannot reverse the cable when you make this connection.
Refer to sub-section 4.1.2 in this Manual for instructions to care for and assemble
the sub-sea connectors. Make all interconnections between the sub-sea assemblies and tighten the locking collars by hand. Do not over tighten the sub-sea connectors.
Connect the SDC to the umbilical cable:
8. Refer either to sub-section 4.2.2 of this Manual or to the 440 Manual for instructions to complete the connection using the selected communication method.
B.1.5.1 System Configuration
The DeepView for Windows software allows you to configure and control both Systems in a Dualtrack installation.
If you are installing Dualtrack operation as an upgrade to an existing 440 or 350 System:
Ensure your SDC is capable of running Microsoft Windows™ 2000 and the DeepView
for Windows software. Contact TSS (International) Ltd for advice if necessary.
In a Dualtrack System, the 440 SEP must communicate using RS232. If your 440 SEP
uses 2-wire or 4-wire communications, refer to sub-section 4.2.2.1 of this Manual and
set RS232 communications before you install the SEP on the ROV.
Follow the instructions in sub-section 5.1 of this Manual to install the software onto
your SDC.
To configure the Dualtrack System properly you must complete the following actions.
1. Use the DeepView for Windows System Configuration Wizard to configure the 440
and the 350 Systems correctly. Select Dualtrack for the SEP type. Refer to subsection 6.2.2 of this Manual for instructions to configure the 350 System. Refer to
the 440 Manual for instructions to configure that System.
IMPORTANT
You must select Dualtrack as the SEP type even if you intend to use only one of the
Systems during the survey.
2. Take care to enter all details completely and correctly. Set appropriate altimeter
offsets for the 440 and the 350 Systems.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 12
350 Cable Survey System
B.1.5.2 System Operation
When supplied as part of a complete Dualtrack System the SDC will have all the software necessary to operate already installed and tested. After power-on the SDC will
perform an initialisation sequence and DeepView for Windows will then start automatically.
Contact TSS for advice if you wish to upgrade an existing 440 or 350 System to a
Dualtrack.
1. Refer to this Manual and the 440 Manual for instructions to use DeepView for Windows in its 440 and 350 modes.
2. Use the selection buttons on the DeepView for Windows tool bar to
select either the 440 or the 350 operating mode. These buttons are
available for use only if you select Dualtrack as the SEP type in the
System Configuration Wizard. The buttons are mutually exclusive –
you cannot operate the installation with the 440 System and the 350 System operating simultaneously.
3. DeepView for Windows annotates the internal logging file with the operating mode
so that it can replay the file correctly.
Note that the external logging file changes its format when you switch between the 440
and the 350 mode. Be aware that this might cause problems with the data logger and its
software.
B.1.6 Power Supply Requirement
CAUTION
You might cause permanent damage to the sub-sea installations of the 440 or the 350
System if you operate them from an incorrect electrical supply.
The standard sub-sea components of both Systems operate from a nominal 110V AC
electrical supply. Optionally, both Systems are available for operation from a nominal
240V AC electrical supply.
When you interconnect the 440 and the 350 Systems within a Dualtrack installation,
you must operate both Systems from the same electrical supply.
Specifications for the Dualtrack System are as listed in Section 8.1 of the relevant
Manual for the 440 and 350 Systems.
Note that the sub-sea components of the Dualtrack System must operate from the
same nominal supply voltage (either 110V or 240V AC as appropriate).
The maximum current consumption for the Dualtrack System is 3.1A at 110V AC
nominal electrical supply or 1.8A at 240V AC nominal electrical supply.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 12
B – Options
B.2 TRAINING
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System is a precision ‘front line’ survey tool. To exploit
the full potential of the System, all personnel involved with a survey that uses the 350
System – from the initial planning stages to final data presentation – should possess
a sound understanding of the performance of the System and its application.
To support this recommendation, TSS (International) Ltd has developed two levels of
training course to provide for the needs of those who will be involved with a survey
that uses the 350 System. For efficiency, TSS limits the maximum number of participants for each course to four.
On successful completion of the training course, the participants will be asked to complete a written test. Provided they demonstrate an acceptable level of understanding
at this test, they will receive a numbered Training Certificate.
B.2.1 Part 1: Foundation Course
The Foundation Course meets the needs of all personnel who will be involved with
the 350 System, such as Survey Managers, Operation Managers, ROV Managers,
Surveyors, Party Chiefs, Data Processors and Clients’ Representatives.
Participants will receive comprehensive course notes. The course duration is approximately four hours and covers the following:
❐
System overview
❐
Principles of operation
❐
Initial installation
❐
Software overview and interfacing with other equipment
❐
Operational considerations and limitations
❐
Practical demonstration
On completion of the Foundation Course, participants will have gained an understanding of the operating theory of the 350 System. They will also be aware of the
considerations necessary at the pre-survey, operations, data acquisition and data
processing phases of a survey that uses the 350 System.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 12
350 Cable Survey System
B.2.2 Part 2: Operators and Engineers Course
This course is a continuation of the Foundation Course and provides for operators
and engineers who use the 350 System during a survey, for example ROV Supervisors, ROV Pilots and Offshore Technicians.
The course duration is approximately two hours and covers the following:
❐
Use of the System as part of a Dualtrack installation
❐
Pod disassembly and reassembly
❐
Circuit board functions
❐
Signal analysis within the SEP
❐
Advanced fault finding
❐
Regular maintenance procedures
❐
System test procedures
Participants in this part of the training course should possess a basic understanding
of electronics.
On completion of this part of the training course, participants should have gained a
good understanding of the hardware and circuit functions of the 350 System. To demonstrate that they have understood the technical training, there will be an opportunity
for course participants to find realistic sample faults introduced by the engineer who is
running the course.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 12 of 12
C – Cables and Tones
C CABLES AND TONES
The target cable must carry a suitable tone signal before the 350 System can detect
it. This tone signal should have the following characteristics:
❐
It should be easy for the 350 System to identify it among other signals that the target cable or other cables in the survey area might be carrying.
❐
It should have a frequency within a ‘quiet’ part of the pass band of the 350 System.
❐
The tone current should be of sufficient amplitude to provide a signal that is above
the background noise level.
The 350 System can survey cables of any length. You may improve the effectiveness
of the System if you select a suitable tone frequency and current for the specific
cable. This appendix offers some basic advice on a method for injecting a tone onto a
target cable so that you may use the 350 System to perform the survey.
TSS can supply a tone generator for use with the 350 System. Refer to TSS for
advice if necessary.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 4
350 Cable Survey System
C.1 TONE INJECTION
The TSS 350 Cable Survey System is an active cable location system that detects
the magnetic fields associated with a tone carried on the cable.
To perform a survey on a cable, the 350 System can use any tone frequency up to a
maximum of 200Hz. In theory therefore, the System could be used to survey a live
power cable because of the mains frequency ‘tone’ that it carries. In practice however
this may not be possible or desirable for the following reasons:
❐
The tone must be single-phase.
❐
There may be many local sources of interference at the same frequency.
By injecting a tone onto a cable, you may select a frequency in the range 10Hz to
200Hz that is relatively free from interference. Refer to sub-section 6.2.2 for instructions to change the detection frequency of the 350 System.
C.1.1 Frequency Selection
Selection of a suitable tone frequency and current will depend upon specific circumstances. Note the following guidelines:
Table C–1: Effects of tone frequency choice
Advantage
Disadvantage
Increased tone
frequency
Increased detection ranges available from the
350 System.
Decreased transmission distance for the tone
along the cable length.
Increased tone
current
Increased detection ranges available from the
350 System.
Increased noise generation in repeaters of fibreoptic cables.
Generally, a low frequency is better for long cable runs and a high frequency is better
for short cable runs.
To avoid strong interference affecting the survey, the 350 System provides some
advanced signal monitoring facilities. These allow you to examine the spectrum and
to set a tone frequency in a region of relatively low background noise.
C.1.2 Connection to the cable
Throughout the length of the cable, the tone-carrying conductor must be insulated
from sea water. Where applicable, provide a good ground connection at the end of
the cable farthest from the current source.
C.1.2.1 Short cables
For short cables (of less than approximately 100km, depending upon the capacitance
of the cable) you will need access to both ends of the cable:
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 4
C – Cables and Tones
Figure C–1: Tone injection – Short cables
You must connect the tone generator vf between the near end of the cable and a
good ground point. At the far end of the cable, you must connect the tone-carrying
conductor to a good ground point to provide an effective signal return path.
C.1.2.2 Long cables
As shown in Figure C–2, the conductors possess some small capacitance to the environment that surrounds the cable. If the cable is long (greater than approximately
100km) then the tone signal will find a return path through the distributed capacitance
Cc of the cable. The impedance of this path reduces as the tone frequency increases.
Figure C–2: Tone injection – Long cables
Under these circumstances, it is not always necessary to make a separate ground
connection at the far end of the cable.However, you will reduce the effects of tone
leakage by connecting the far end of the cable to a good grounding point.
The capacitance of the conductors extends throughout the length of the cable. This
represents a progressive short circuit that means less tone current flows at the far end
of the cable than at the near end. The detection range of the 350 System depends upon
the current flowing at the tone frequency. It follows therefore that the measurement
range of the 350 System decreases with the distance from the point of tone injection.
C.1.2.3 Fibre-optic Cables
In most cases, fibre-optic cables carry at least one conductor to supply power for the
repeaters or to act as a dedicated tone-carrying facility.
Alternatively, when there is no other conductor available, the armoured covering of a
fibre-optic cable can be used to carry the tone, provided it is insulated from ground.
The owner of the fibre-optic cable will usually specify the maximum level of tone current that the cable can tolerate. This is to limit the amount of noise that may be generated within repeaters along the cable.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 4
350 Cable Survey System
The 350 System cannot be used to survey a fibre-optic cable unless the cable can carry
an electrical tone through a conductive core or through its insulated armoured covering.
C.1.2.4 General Connection Requirements
❐
Always use good grounding connections throughout the installation to avoid introducing mains related frequencies onto the cable.
❐
You must separate the return path from the outgoing tone current. Do not use a
separate conductor in the same cable to provide a return path.
❐
Do not allow the tone current to exceed the maximum rating for cable circuits that
have repeaters.
C.1.3 Seawater Return Path
If the far end of the cable is in the water, then the sea water itself can provide the signal return path. To use this method, you should attach a sacrificial anode to the
exposed cable core and seal the cable against water ingress at the far end.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 4
D – ALTIMETER
D ALTIMETER
D.1 OVERVIEW
This appendix contains operating and service instructions for the ALT-250 sonar
altimeter. The ALT-250 is a high resolution sub-sea echo sounder designed to accurately determine the height of sub sea instrumentation from the seabed.
The unit is supplied ready configured to use with TSS detection products.
The unit produces a narrow beam acoustic sonar pulse that “illuminates” a small section of the seabed. The travel time for the pulse to be reflected from the seabed is
measured using a high stability timer and converted to distance in meters for output to
the serial port where can be recorded by the SEP, or transmitted to the SDC. Noise
rejection algorithms allow the altimeter to be used for short range measurements
even in areas of high suspended sediment.
The electronics are housed in a corrosion resistant hard anodised aluminium pressure case which can withstand depths up to 3000 metres dependent on the model.
A PRT100 temperature sensor is offered as standard and the reading is appended to
the output data string. A 7 way connector provides power and data to and from the
altimeter.
Table D–1: Altimeter Specification
Transmit Frequency
250kHz
Transmit pulse width
40 microseconds
Beam width
9º, conical
Pulse repetition rate
5/second
Maximum range
30m
Minimum range
0.8m
Digital output
RS232 with switchable baud rates of 2400 or 9600
(other options available if required)
Resolution
1cm
Power requirement
8 TO 24 VDC (24VDC for modem option)
Supply current
50mA @ 17VDC
Maximum depth
3000m (dependent on depth sensor if fitted)
Mating connector
Impulse LPMIL-7-MP Inline
Distance accuracy
76.2mm diameter, (87mm max) X 205mm
Temperature accuracy
±0.5ºC standard.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
D.2 INSTALLATION
D.2.1 Electrical Connection
The 7 way bulkhead connector is protected by the plastic end cap which also prevents the connector turning and loosening the pressure seal between the connector
and the pressure housing face.
The in-line connector, (male), must first be lubricated by smearing silicone lubricant or
other compatible silicone grease on all the pins. Ensure the lubricant does not cover
any part of the acoustic transducer encapsulation as this will have a detrimental effect
on the acoustic properties of the transducer. If silicone grease is inadvertently
splashed over the transducer face, remove with a clean rag and wash with a mild
detergent.
Ensure the connector pins are aligned correctly with the mating bulkhead connector
before applying force as the connectors can be damaged if incorrectly mated. If
resistance is felt when mating the connectors this means the pins are not aligned correctly in which case start again.
When the connector is disconnected; insert dummy plugs or smear with silicone
grease if the connector is likely to be exposed to sea water or other corrosive element.
D.2.2 Serial Output
The connector supplies power and data between the altimeter and a terminal or other
device which can receive RS232 signal levels, for example the SEP. The internal
switch, S1/3 allows the option of two different baud rates to be chosen. The standard
baud rate options are 2400, (switch off) or 9600, (switch on) both with no parity, 8
data bits and one stop bit. For use with the 440 or 350 system, leave switch S1/3 in
the off position for 2400 baud.
The output format is the standard TSS/Datasonics string: see section 7.3.3 for details.
Table D–2: Power/ data connector pinout
Pin No
Wire Colour
Function
1
Black
Power 0V
2
White
Aux input ground (optional)
3
Red
+24VDC Power input
4
Green
RS-232 Ground
5
Blue
External trigger in (optional)
6
Brown
RS-232 Transmit output
7
Yellow
Aux signal (optional)
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 18
D – ALTIMETER
D.2.3 Mounting
Position the altimeter away from other acoustic instruments that may cause interference, this may be necessary even if the other instrumentation is operating at a different frequency due to the “near field” effect of the acoustic transmission.
Make sure the altimeter is positioned away from turbulence such as propeller noise or
anything that could cause aeration in the water, (acoustic signals are greatly attenuated by the interface between sea water and air bubbles).
Figure D–1: Mounting arrangement
Mount the altimeter using part number 305676, as shown in figure D–1, or a secure
mounting bracket with, rubber protective sleeve around the altimeter body, making
sure the altimeter transducer is the nearest point to the seabed, in other words there
must be no metal work that could conduct the acoustic signal to the transducer bypassing the water column. Remember the minimum range is 0.8 metres therefore if
an under range data output is to be avoided mount the altimeter at least 0.8 metres
above the bottom.
Make sure the altimeter is mounted perpendicular to the horizontal flying position of
the sub sea vehicle, the beam angle is limited to 9º therefore any misalignment has a
detrimental effect on the operation of the altimeter. Ensure the mounting is secure
and not liable to vibration or movement.
Although the specification quotes 9º beam width the coverage area may increase at
minimum range due to the “side lobes” produced by the acoustic transducer. This can
be caused by a strong reflector close to the altimeter being reflected before the main
beam echo is received thus causing the object to be seen before the main beam is
reflected off the seabed. This situation would cause a reduced range to be recorded.
Make sure the anodised aluminium finish is not damaged as this will cause corrosion
when the instrument is next deployed.
Connect an optional safety leash from the altimeter end cap using a stainless steel
8mm bolt and two washers. Make sure the M8 bolt does not protrude to the aluminium bulkhead as this will damage the anodising.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
D.2.4 Maintenance
The altimeter should be immersed in fresh water if it is not to be used in the next couple of days then placed in a dry environment. Inspect the transducer face and clean
with a mild detergent if the transducer face is not clean. It is important to ensure the
transducer face is clean to ensure maximum efficiency of acoustic energy into seawater. Ensure no silicone grease from the connector is allowed to come into contact with
the transducer face.
D.2.5 Test in Air
The altimeter should first be tested in air to ensure its correct operation. This can be
done by connecting the unit to +24VDC, or 8-24VDC if switch mode operation is
selected, and reading the serial output data with a PC terminal emulation program
such as Hyper Terminal.
The range data output should read R99.99E when the unit is in air whilst temperature,
(Txx.x), should read air temperature. The altimeter should emit a “ticking” sound at a
rate of 5 per second thus confirming the transmitter is working and that the power
supply is sufficient to power the altimeter. If the voltage is too low to power the altimeter the serial data will still output data but there will be no ticking sound.
The high frequency used for the altimeter is greatly attenuated in air therefore the signal is not able to travel more than approximately 1 metre, (indicated) in air, although
the signal can be seen on an oscilloscope at TP7. The pre-deployment check should
consist of rubbing the transducer face when the range serial output should change
from 99.99 to an erratically changing value.
D.2.6 Internal Settings
Ensure the internal switch is in the correct position: this should already be set for
2400 baud for use with the TSS 440 and 350.
If the internal switch needs changing, make sure the housing is clean and free from
debris before unscrewing the captive retaining ring ensuring water or debris does not
enter the pressure housing when the transducer and electronics are separated.
As the electronics board is lifted from the housing make sure the interconnecting
cable is free and is not caught on components causing strain on the connector and
wires.
Table D–3: Switch S1 settings
1
Internal input select
On: TTL input, Off: RS-232 level input
2
Internal/ external trigger
On: External, Off: Internal (default)
3
Baud rate select
On: 9600, Off: 2400 (default)
4
Step-up power supply disable
On: 17-24V input, Off: 8-24V input (default)
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 18
D – ALTIMETER
Figure D–2: Switch S1 layout
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
RS232/TTL
INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
BAUD 2400/9600
SHUT DOWN
When the switch has been switched to the correct position the electronics board can
be inserted into the pressure housing first ensuring the interconnecting cable is free
alongside the printed circuit board. Ensure the board is slid down so the end of the
board sits to one side of the internal cable at the bulkhead connector taking care not
to damage the internal anodised finish of the O ring seal area as the PCB is slid
down, (see figure D–3).
Figure D–3: Reassembly of the unit.
Ensure the rubber “O” rings are free from contamination and if necessary remove and
clean the O rings and grooves before re-greasing with silicone or compatible O ring
grease.
The area around the O rings must be meticulously clean to ensure a good pressure
seal when the unit enters the water. Inspect with a magnifying glass to make sure the
surface of the O ring and housing are clean.
D.3 THEORY OF OPERATION
This section describes the operation of the ALT250. The theory describes the general
principles of acoustics and the technical description covers the basic operation of the
altimeter. Do not attempt to repair the altimeter unless you are an experienced electronics technician used to working with surface mount components.
D.3.1 Operating Principles
The altimeter determines the round trip time of the Sonar pulse travelling from the
transducer through the water column then reflected off the seabed and received back
at the transducer. The time the Sonar pulse takes to make this journey equates to the
two way distance. The distance can be determined by comparing the measured time
to the known speed of sound in water then dividing by 2 to get the one way distance.
The speed of sound in water varies according to conditions, (due mainly to salinity
and temperature). The altimeter defaults to 1480 metres/second which is a default
average for speed of sound in sea water.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
D.3.1.1 Speed of Sound
The altimeter uses a high accuracy timer to measure the flight time of an acoustic
pulse. The timer is accurate to 1µs, (0.74mm @1480metres/second), which is the
speed of sound, (SOS), default value, however this speed of sound value is dependent on many factors and requires an accurate “VP” meter or CTD instrument to determine the exact value during the operation, (see figure D–4).
Figure D–4: Speed of Sound meter
The change in SOS is mainly due to temperature where a change of ±1ºC in sea
water temperature causes a change of approximately ± (0.0018 X SOS) metres/second, e.g. a SOS measurement taken at 10ºC is 1480m/s but would change to
~1506.64m/s at 20ºC. Note: this is a very approximate calculation and is included
only to demonstrate the effect that temperature has on VP.
The SOS is also affected, to a lesser extent, by changes in salinity and depth. There
are many different formulae for calculating SOS; for more information consult one of
the many books on this subject for example Robert J.Urick’s “Principles of Underwater Sound”.
The Altimeter temperature reading is not used in the SOS calculation. The default
SOS is 1480m/s; if a different value is required simply apply a correction to the serial
output as follows: (SOS/1480) x Range reading.
D.3.1.2 Terminology
There are many acoustic terms associated with underwater acoustics and associated
technology; here are just some of them:
❐
Sonar Equation: The transmitter sound source should be greater than all the
losses due to range, reflector, and sea water absorption plus the threshold value
required at the receiver. The altimeter is designed for losses over 30 metres.
❐
Transducer: Converts electrical energy into sound or sound into electrical energy.
This is housed within the potting compound of the altimeter.
❐
Transducer beam width: The area of sound when plotted to the half power point in
front of the transducer. This applies both to transmit and receive modes.
❐
VP: Velocity of propagation or speed of sound
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 18
D – ALTIMETER
❐
Noise level: Acoustic sounds in sea water due to ships, hydraulics, or other sonar
equipment.
❐
Reflectivity: the attenuation of the transmitted sonar pulse due to the material/
angle of the reflector, (in this case the seabed).
❐
DB: This is the term Decibel which is used to express sound level in relation to a
reference level, usually 1 micro Pascal at 1 metre. This can be negative when
expressing receiver sensitivity or positive if expressing transmitted sound level.
❐
Absorption: The loss due to sea water which increases for higher frequency.
❐
Reverberation: Received signals due to various scatterers of sonar signals such
as sea surface, tiny particles in the sea water and bottom reflections. This can be
heard on old war films as the slowly decaying quivering tonal blast following the
ping of an echo sounder. The altimeter locks on to the first signal and rejects the
following reverb.
❐
PRT100: Platinum Resistance Thermometer which consists of a platinum wire calibrated for 100 ohms at 0°C and 138.5 ohms at 100°C. Accuracy is ±0.15°C for a
class A device as used in the altimeter.
❐
Pressure sensor: Device for measuring depth in sea water. Consists of a strain
gauge element which converts pressure to an electrical signal.
❐
Switch mode power supply: Circuitry within the altimeter which boosts the supply
voltage to the required level.
❐
TVG: Time Varying Gain. This is applied to the sonar signal to compensate for
range and absorption losses in sea water. The altimeter TVG signature is stored in
the non-volatile memory of the microcontroller.
D.3.1.3 Propagation Loss
The propagation loss describes the weakening of sound between a point 1 metre
from the surface of the transducer and a point at distance from that point in the water
column.
The propagation loss consists of spreading or ranging loss and loss due to attenuation in sea water. The altimeter is designed to normalise these losses by applying a
varying gain, (TVG), to the sonar receiver.
Circuitry within the altimeter rejects near field signals from transducer side lobes to
enable detection of minimum range values.
D.3.1.4 Limitations
The altimeter must not be used alongside instruments operating at or near the same
frequency. The power supply should be DC with good regulation; the altimeter is
designed for worst case power supply electrical noise by the use of analogue filters at
the DC power input, however, noise at or near the Sonar frequency may cause problems.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
The altimeter housing is hard anodised to protect from corrosion in sea water and for
limited protection from mishandling. The anodised surface must not be damaged as
this will cause corrosion to develop leading to eventual failure of the pressure housing.
The altimeter can be affected by transmission of sound through the supporting structure leading to an erroneous range value that is less than the correct range therefore
to ensure this does not happen make sure the altimeter is de-coupled mechanically
from the structure by using rubber inserts or similar.
The range of the unit is limited; however, it is possible to pick up reflections which are
called “multiples”. These multiple reflections give the impression of a good range
being received by the altimeter but are, in fact, pulses received from the previous
transmission that have travelled to the bottom or sea surface and been reflected in
time for the reception time of the latest transmission. The result is a range that should
be outside the range of the altimeter appearing as a good range.
The ships echo sounder should be checked to determine if ranges from the altimeter
are multiples from an over range water column.
Mount the altimeter at least 0.8m from the bottom of the sub sea vehicle; any range
less than 0.8m will show as an error; however multiples can still be received.
D.3.2 Technical Description
The altimeter circuitry is divided into several sub systems to enable a clearer understanding of the system. The sub systems are all manufactured on one printed circuit
board.
Test points are available to aid faultfinding and commissioning. The circuitry uses
miniature surface mount components therefore great care must be taken to avoid
damaging the circuitry. Do not short connections as probes are inserted. The following points are present:.
Table D–4: Testpoints
TP 1
Spare connection for MONO8 interface.
TP 2
Timer input to micro from sensor/ sonar receiver MUX.
TP 3
Raw sonar signal before bandpass but after sonar receiver.
TP 4
Sonar receiver output signal (positive pulse).
TP 5
Detected sonar signal (negative pulse).
TP 6
High voltage Tx signal across acoustic transducer.
TP 7
Transmitter Tx pulse TTL drive.
D.3.2.1 Power Supply
Input voltage can range between 8-24VDC providing the SHDN signal is high; (S1/5
is off). If the power supply is known to be constantly above 17VDC switch S1/5 can be
switched on thus disabling the dc-dc converter to conserve power.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 18
D – ALTIMETER
The dc-dc converter is also controlled by an automatic switch which puts the circuit in
SHDN mode if the DC input is higher than 15.7VDC.
The transmitter voltage is regulated to 12.9VDC to allow operation of the transmitter
driver chip which requires at least 12VDC to operate, (the driver output will go open
circuit if the voltage falls below this).
The digital 5Vsupply is fed from a normal linear regulator. This supply inhibits the dcdc converter if it falls below approximately 4.5VDC.
Smoothing reservoir capacitors are used at the DC input and also at the +5VDC line
to eliminate any noise that is passed from the power supply.
D.3.2.2 Transmitter
The microcontroller generates a TTL signal pulse at TP7 which determines operating
frequency and pulse length, both these parameters are programmed into the microcontroller’s flash memory and can be altered if necessary, by the manufacturer, using
the programming input header J4.
The transmitter power section is interfaced to the microcontroller signal level by a
power driver which is designed to switch high current signals via the two MOSFET
transistors IC15 & IC17 through the step up transformer T1 or optionally T2.
The secondary inductance of the transformer and the capacitance of the transducer
components form a tuned circuit at the operating frequency thus forming a high amplitude sine wave. Fine tuning of the transmitter output is achieved by adding capacitors
to C43 and C47, (working voltage of the capacitors are 1000VDC).
The transmitter is inhibited if the +5VDC supply falls below 4.5VDC.
The transformer secondary inductance and tuning capacitors are kept out of the
receiver path by steering diodes. A damping resistor R45 reduces ringing from the
transducer when the transmitter pulse is removed.
D.3.2.3 Receiver
The same transducer is used to receive and transmit therefore protection diodes in
series with a resistor protect the sensitive receiver circuit when transmission occurs.
TVG is applied to the signal before being fed to a band pass filter set to the operating
frequency. The signal is then demodulated and fed to a threshold detector.
Gain control lines GAIN1-8 are fed from the microcontroller and provide TVG control
of the receiver; this enables received signals varying over a wide dynamic range to be
received. The initial sensitivity of the system is controlled by the microcontroller which
switches an attenuator into circuit reducing the amplitude of the signal before reaching the receiver.
Signal BLANK, from the microcontroller controls the attenuator for the initial reception
period which is set at a nominal 1 metre during which period high amplitude signals
from side lobes and near field objects are attenuated.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
The output of the receiver is fed to a comparator which has two threshold settings set
by the microcontroller. The initial threshold is set approximately 4dB higher for this
period thus allowing echo signals to be received even when direct signals are still
being received from the effect of transducer ringing.
The detected receiver signal is fed to a capture timer on the microcontroller which
stops the timer on the negative edge of the received pulse.
The same timer channel is also used to read the temperature/depth transducer; this is
carried out by a multiplexer connected to both circuits and controlled by the microcontroller.
D.3.2.4 Sensor Circuitry
The sensor circuitry is a complete front end for the measurement of passive sensors
such as temperature and pressure using an advanced chopping technique to remove
low frequency interference. The analogue sensor signal is converted into a digital format and read by the microcontroller. The sensor interface converts to 12 bit accuracy.
A three phase technique is used to measure system offset, reference and finally the
sensor signal. Good long term stability is assured by the auto calibration process carried out by the microcontroller to determine changes in offset and reference for each
measurement period.
The sensor circuitry is located close to the sensor to reduce resistance between sensor and electronics; however, even the small resistance changes due to temperature
effect etc. are corrected by software using the offset and reference measurements.
The chopping technique filters out any spurious noise generated by internal or external circuits.
The accuracy of the sensor is determined by the accuracy of the temperature or
depth sensor itself and the reference resistor R1. Corrections can also be made in the
microcontroller to achieve greater accuracy. The reference resistor is currently a
100R resistor 0.01% < 0.6ppm/ºC accuracy which equates to an initial accuracy of
±0.01R or 0.026ºC plus temperature drift which is negligible.
D.3.2.5 Digital Circuitry
The digital circuitry comprises the microcontroller and serial communication plus
associated circuitry. The microcontroller operates at a speed of 8MHz and is used to
process all transmission and receive functions in conjunction with the associated
hardware.
The firmware for the microcontroller, (68HC908KX8), can be programmed using the
mini “MONO8” connector at J4. This connector allows the micro to be programmed insitu using its flash memory to retain the data when power is removed.
Standard tools from Motorola are available that allow the manufacturer to program via
this connection without the need to connect to the power supply.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 18
D – ALTIMETER
The serial data is converted to RS232 levels in the digital section where the usual protection diodes etc. are situated.
The +12VDC for the RS232 interface is derived from the transmitter +12VDC and the
minus -12VDC from a +12VDC to -12V DC-DC converter circuit.
D.3.2.6 Averaging Algorithm
The microcontroller uses a moving weighted averaging algorithm to ensure that any
momentary noise or interference from the Sonar signal does not appear as a range at
the data output. This is achieved by giving each new range a weight of 25% while the
previous range is given a weight of 75%. If the new range differs significantly from the
old the new range will be replaced with the old. If more than two unacceptable ranges
are received the next new range is accepted. Each new range occurs approximately
0.2 second apart.
D.3.2.7 Optional Modem
Position IC1 is for an optional modem module. This module receives the serial data
from the altimeter and superimposes the data on to the +24VDC power cable; this
allows the altimeter to connect using just two cable cores over long cables using FSK
modem technology. To use this option the power supply must be +24VDC. Switch S1
switch 3 and switch 4 to the on position to select 9600 baud and dc-dc converter
inhibit.
D.4 PART NUMBERS
Table D–5: Part numbers
500292
Altimeter, subsea TSS-ALT-250 (no cable or accessories)
500294
As above, detection kit (includes bracket 601824A)
500295
Altimeter, including 3m pigtail 601826A
601824A
Cable ALT-250 to TSS 350/440 SEP (3m)
601825A
Cable ALT-250 to TSS 350/440 SEP (7m)
601826A
Pigtail (3m)
601827A
Pigtail (7m)
402321
Separate manual
307558
O-Ring
402608
Carton
200809
Mini wet-pluggable free lead, LPMIL-7-MP200809
305676
Mounting kit
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 11 of 18
J3
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M3
NFM61R1nF
GND
GND
RS232TXD
RS232RXD
AUX I/P
M1
W3F470
(*MODEM POSITION)
0V
0V
TXD
RXD
AUX_I/P
0V
+12V
TO BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
PWRINH
GND
POWER_LO
POWER_HI
F1
2
S1
TTLRS232_2
PWRINH
1
2
3
4
1
S1G
D1
INTEXT
UTI_PD
TCH0
BLANK
GAIN 8
GAIN 4
GAIN 2
GAIN 1
TCH1
VCC
GND
data from
altimeter
TTLRS232_1
TCH0
2
8
7
6
5
POWER_HI
GND
GND
BAUD
SHDN
TCH0
UTI_PD
TCH0
BLANK
GAIN8
GAIN4
GAIN2
GAIN1
TCH1
VCC
GND
POWER_HI
GND
GND
SHDN
TCH0
BLANK
GAIN 8
GAIN 4
GAIN 2
GAIN 1
TCH1
VCC
GND
SONAR_0
SWITCH POSITIONS
ANALOGUE
1: ON = EXT I/P TTL
OFF = EXT I/P RS232
2: ON = EXT TRIGGER
OFF = INTERNAL TRIGGER
3: ON = *9600 BAUD
OFF = 2400 BAUD
4: ON = *MIN SUPPLY = 16V
OFF = MIN SUPPLY = 7V
(on switches off the dc-dc converter for better efficiency)
SMD100 30V
1
M2
MICROCONTROLER: GROUP 4
COMMS: GROUP 3
RS232TXD
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
TTLRS232_1
2
DIGITAL
DIGITAL_0
TTLRS232_2
GND
+5V
AUX I/P
DATA OUT
DATA IN
INTEXT
OPTIONAL MODEM
SONAR TX: GROUP 6
SONAR
SONAR RX: GROUP 5
POWER: GROUP 1
ANALOGUE I/F: GROUP 2
ANALOGUE_0
TCH0
RXD
TXD
RXD
TXD
BAUD
* DISABLES DC-DC CONVERTER
(Only use for voltages above 16VDC)
or MODEM option
UTI_PD
UTI_PD
1
RX232RXD1
RS232RXD
W3F470
TXHI
RXHI
GND
ACGND
VCC
B
F
E
C
D
DR4
DR3
DR3_4_C
A
VCC
VCC
GND
GND
GND
3
4
5
6
7
CONFIG
© TSS (International) Ltd
REF_L
REF_L
FORCE_H
SENSH
SENSL
SENSL_1
SENSL_2
REF_H
REF_H
TXHI
RXHI
GND
ACGND
OFF
ON
1
RS232 TTL
J2
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
R1
2
SENSOR
INTERFACE
TRANSDUCER
I/F
4 HEADER
2
EXT
INT
J1
3
9600
2400
1
2
3
4
4
SHDN
NORM
SWITCH POSITIONS
0.01%
DPN 402197
RREF
IC1 MOD-I/F-1
350 Cable Survey System
D.5 DRAWINGS
Figure D–5: Block Diagram
Page 12 of 18
D – ALTIMETER
Figure D–6: Internal wiring
GND
AUX INPUT GND
2
RED
+24V
3
GREEN
3
AUX IN
1
SER OUT GND
1
6
YELLOW
AUX INPUT
7
BLUE
6
2
BROWN
SER OUT
2
4
4
0V
7
2
3
TXD
Underwater connector
Internal wiring
5
GND
6
GND
7
EXT TRIG/SER IN
EXT TRIG/SER IN
5
1
2
WHITE
PWR IN
1
2
1
1
BLACK
4
J3 (on PCB)
Figure D–7: Temperature sensor wiring
2K2
JP?
R22
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
308-7827
FORCE_H
SENS_H
SENS_L
RED
RED
WHITE
SENSOR
PRT100
REFH1
REFH
REFL
FORCEL
WHITE
REFH1
HEADER 9
REFH
R1
100R REF
REFL
FORCEL
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 13 of 18
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
1
3
4
601824A
3. HEATSHRINK CABLE LABEL:
"601824A" TSS P/N
4. CLEAR ADHESIVE LINED HEATSHRINK SLEEVE OVER LABEL
1. IMPULSE LPMIL-7-MP OR EQVT
WITH 3m TAIL
PARTS REQUIRED:
VIEW LOOKING AT PINS ON
FACE OF FREE CONNECTOR
PL
ITEM1
2
ITEM2
2
3
1
5
6
4
TO
1&5
3
4
ITEM
2
(PL)
NO CONNECTION
TO OTHER PINS
1
3
6
ITEM
1
(PL)
WIRING SCHEDULE:
VIEW LOOKING AT PINS ON
PL
350 Cable Survey System
Figure D–8: ALT-250 / TSS underwater splice p/n 601824A
Page 14 of 18
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
1
3
4
601826A
**** IDENT SLEEVES FITTED AT RH END OF CABLE.
*** CLEAR ADHESIVE LINED HEATSHRINK SLEEVE OVER LABEL
** HEATSHRINK CABLE LABEL:
"601826A" TSS P/N
* IMPULSE LPMIL-7-MP OR EQVT
WITH 3m TAIL SO18/8
PARTS REQUIRED:
VIEW LOOKING AT PINS ON
FACE OF FREE CONNECTOR
PL
400mm ± 50mm
3m ± 0.05m NTS
5
50mm ± 5mm
D – ALTIMETER
Figure D–9: ALT-250 free cable
Page 15 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
Figure D–10: PCB layout - top
Figure D–11: PCB - top
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 16 of 18
D – ALTIMETER
Figure D–12: PCB layout - bottom
Figure D–13: PCB bottom
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 17 of 18
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 18 of 18
E – Coil Tester
E COIL TESTER
The Coil Tester is a convenient and uncomplicated solution to confirm the 350 Cable
Survey System is functioning in the correct manner. This is achieved by generating a
localised and controlled alternating magnetic field.
The Coil Tester provides the following benefits:
❐
A quick and simple method for testing the individual search coils of 350 Cable Survey System and the associated cables, connectors and circuitry.
❐
A circular recess in body to securely house a search coil.
❐
Momentary action push-on/release-off power and battery test switch.
❐
Tester condition LED.
❐
Due to the Coil Tester being powered by a 9V alkaline battery, it is completely
portable and self-contained.
❐
Protected to IP65 preventing water ingress when operating in exposed environments.
To achieve accurate results the Coil Tester should be used with a fully calibrated 350
Cable Survey System with the Surface Display Computer (SDC) configured with the
coil calibration constants stamped onto each coil.
It is important to have a thorough working knowledge of the 350 Cable Survey System and clear understanding of the information outlined in this section prior to using
the Coil Tester.
All instructions outlined in this section should be followed to prevent misuse of, or
damage to, the Coil Tester.
E.1 Pre-Operation
Page 3
The 350 Cable Survey System needs to correctly configured prior to using the Coil
Tester. If not, it will provide degraded results.
To achieve accurate results from the 350 Cable Survey System coil calibration constants provided by TSS (International) Ltd need to be entered using the SDC.
E.2 Operation
Page 5
Operating instructions for the 350 Cable Survey System can be found in Section 6.
The Coil Tester is used in conjunction with the 350 Cable Survey System to identify
any potential faults with the system search coils.
E.3 Fault Identification
Page 8
If the Coil Tester provides inaccurate results it may be faulty. This section outlines the
steps to take if a fault is suspected.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
E.4 Battery Replacement
Page 8
The Coil Tester provides a facility to identify when the battery needs to be replaced.
E.5 Maintenance
Page 9
It is important to ensure the Coil Tester is correctly maintained to ensure correct operation.
E.6 Specification
Page 9
Outlines the Coil Tester specification.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 10
E – Coil Tester
E.1 PRE-OPERATION
Prior to using the Coil Tester:
❐
Read the complete 350 Cable Survey System Manual.
❐
Install the 350 System according to the instructions provided in Section 3 Physical
Installation and Section 4 Electrical Installation.
❐
Ensure the coil calibration constants configured on the Surface Display Computer
(SDC) correspond to the values displayed on the brass connector flanges of the
search coils.
E.1.1 Coil Calibration Constants
TSS takes care during manufacture to ensure the coils and pre-amplifiers are
matched. However, there will inevitably be some residual differences between individual sensing coils.
Each of the sensing coils supplied by TSS has an identification plate that includes a
calibration constant. The 350 Cable Survey System requires this information to compensate for the residual differences between the search coils.
During the coil installation process record the following information:
1. The calibration constants for each of the six search coils.
2. The serial number of each of the six search coils.
3. All search coil positions.
This information can be recorded on the Configuration Log Form in Appendix F.
To access the 350 System Configuration dialog press [SHIFT+F2]
TSS supply the 350 System with port and starboard coil triads assembled and the coil
calibration constants already configured in the Surface Display Computer (SDC), as
shown in Figure E–1 below. However, ensure the values displayed in 350 System
Parameters Configuration screen correspond to the values stamped on the brass
connector flanges of the search coils.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
Figure E–1: 350 System Parameters Configuration screen
If a search coil is replaced, the new 5-digit value for the calibration constant must be
entered for the relevant search coil. This will not affect the operation of any of the
other remaining search coils.
Each of the six coil calibration constants will be different and ensure they are entered
correctly. The numbers include an error-checking element helping to ensure valid
data entry.
When the calibration constants have been correctly entered into the SDC, click OK to
accept the configuration. If the parameters have changed, the new values will be
downloaded to the 350 Subsea Electronics Pod (SEP).
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 10
E – Coil Tester
E.2 OPERATION
The Coil Tester is supplied with default settings of 25Hz. To change the frequency
specified, see Section E.2.1.
Operation of the Coil Tester is very simple procedure outlined in the following steps:
1. Power on the 350 System and ensure the Surface Display Computer (SDC) is
connected to DeepView to confirm the test results. Ensure the coil calibration constants have been entered correctly and the 350 System is setup correctly (see
section E.1.1).
2. Select the Terminal Window into view and set focus to this window. Press
[CTRL+U]. This will display a warning message stating that continuing will stop
communication with the SEP. Click ‘YES’ and the 350 Terminal Menu will be displayed.
3. Press [2] to access the Pre-amp Gain Menu. There are two fields on this screen
outlined in Table E–1 below.
Table E–1: 350 System Subsea Parameters
Parameter
Options
Required Setting
Pre-amp Gain
1,2,3 and 4
4
Pre-amp Autogain
ON or OFF
OFF
To cycle through the available options press [SPACE] bar. Press [ENTER] to accept
settings.
4. As outlined above, set the Pre-amp Gain to 4, Pre-amp Autogain to OFF.
5. When the pre-amp gain and autogain have been set, a chevron will be displayed
on screen.
6. Press [4] to enter the Data Window/FFT Size Menu. Set the tone frequency to
25Hz and press [ENTER] to accept the selection and return to the Terminal Menu.
7. Press [9] to exit the Terminal menu.
8. To re-establish communication with the 350 System, press the Enable/disable
polling on the Terminal Window toolbar. Scrolling data will be displayed on screen
to identify the system is operating correctly.
9. Place the Coil Tester over the end of the search coil so the end of the coil is
seated fully into the circular recess of the tester.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 5 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
10. Note which coil is being tested. This will be defined on the attached connector
cable, as outlined in Table E–1 below.
Table E–2: 350 System Connector Cable Identification
Connector ID
Description
SV
Starboard Vertical
SL
Starboard Lateral
PV
Port Vertical
PL
Port Lateral
SF
Starboard Fore/Aft
PF
Port Fore/Aft
*To test the port or starboard fore/aft coils, the forward search must be used
11. On the Coil Tester press and hold the circular power switch. The battery condition
indicator LED should first show orange as the unit performs a self test and then,
approximately one second later, shows green. If the LED goes red or doesn’t illuminate at all, this indicates that the battery power is low. If necessary, follow the
instructions in Appendix E.4 to replace the battery.
12. While continuing to press the power switch, check the SDC screen and confirm
that the channel being tested shows a signal strength of 1.0 to 1.5e6. The digital
display at the bottom left hand corner of the Run Display screen should show a
value between 1e6 and 1.5e6.
13. Move to the Frequency Spectrum Display either from the Run Display screen or
from the Forward Search Display screen. You may use the Frequency Spectrum
display to examine raw signals received by the six search coil channels. The horizontal axis of the display represents the frequency. The default view is 25Hz. It is
recommended that the frequency scale is raised to 50Hz to view the results. The
logarithmic vertical axis shows the absolute magnitude of signals at each frequency within the displayed band. This screen will confirm that the tested channel
is receiving the tone at a frequency of 25Hz. After the results have been confirmed, toggle through the frequency range to return it to the default scale of 25Hz.
14. If the Run Display screen does not show the expected values, follow the guidelines included in Section E.5.
15. Repeat steps 4 to 12 for the remaining channels of the 350 System.
16. After completing the coil test procedure for all six channels, restore the 350 System to the original tone frequency for the survey. It is important to reset the pre-
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 6 of 10
E – Coil Tester
amp gain and autogain to default settings. Repeat steps 2 and 3 using the values
outlined below.
Table E–3: 350 System Operating Parameters
Parameter
Required Setting
Pre-amp Gain
4
Pre-amp Autogain
ON
17. Press [9] to exit the Terminal Menu.
18. To re-establish communication with the 350 System, press the Enable/disable
polling button on the Terminal Window toolbar. Scrolling data will be displayed on
screen to identify the system is operating correctly.
E.2.1 Frequency Selection
Tests can be run at different frequencies ranging from 25Hz to 21Hz. To do this,
remove the Coil Tester end cap and adjust the Frequency Selection Switch.
When supplied by TSS, the Coil Tester will be set to its default position five and 25Hz.
It is strongly recommended that a default test is carried out using this frequency setting.
It is important to be aware that changing the frequency will change the coil voltage
results achieved. The expected coil voltages for the available frequency outputs are
explained in Table E–4.
Table E–4: Coil Tester Frequency settings and expected coil voltages
Switch Position
Frequency Output
Coil Voltage
5
25Hz +/- 0.0025Hz
1.0 to 1.5e6
4
24Hz +/- 0.0025Hz
0.94 to 1.44e6
3
23Hz +/- 0.0025Hz
0.89 to 1.39e6
2
22Hz +/- 0.0025Hz
0.83 to 1.33e6
1
21Hz +/- 0.0025Hz
0.79 to 1.29e6
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 7 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
E.3 FAULT IDENTIFICATION
If the signal strength displayed on the Run Display screen does not show 1.0 to 1.5e6
at 25Hz for all channel check the following:
❐
Check the condition of the battery in the coil tester. Press the power button and
confirm a constant green light. If a red or unlit LED is indicated, it is necessary to
replace the battery.
❐
Check the display screen of the SDC is showing the channel under test. Note that
to display the port and starboard fore-aft channels (PF and SF respectively) the
Forward Search screen must be selected.
❐
Check that the 350 System has been configured correctly with the coil calibration
constants for all six search coil channels. Check the values displayed on the SDC
correspond to their proper physical channels.
❐
Check the Frequency Spectrum Display to make certain that all six channels are
receiving spurious signals from sources such as noise, mains frequency pickup,
etc. If there are no received signals, investigate a possible fault condition by referring to Section 9 Maintenance.
E.4 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The Coil Tester includes a battery condition LED. Press the battery test switch on the
coil tester and check the LED first shows orange and then, after a short delay, shows
green. The LED should remain green while the switch is pressed to indicate the battery is in good condition.
If the LED goes red or doesn’t illuminate, replace the battery.
To replace the battery complete the following steps:
1. Unscrew the battery compartment end cap.
2. Remove the battery from its positioned secure clip.
3. Replace with a new battery and connect the battery connector.
4. Screw the battery compartment door back into place.
5. Press and hold down the power battery switch on the coil tester and confirm that
the battery condition LED shows the battery to be in a good condition.
The battery life for continuous use is estimated to be thirteen hours or three years in
stand-by mode.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 8 of 10
E – Coil Tester
E.5 MAINTENANCE
The Coil Tester requires minimal maintenance. However, it is important to ensure the
endcap O-ring is free from damage to maintain the IP65 waterproof standard classification. The following tasks should be carried out to ensure the O-ring remains in good
condition:
1. Keep the grooves for the O-ring clean. Avoid any cuts, nicks or splits on any of the
rubber surfaces. Renew the connector O-ring if it has deteriorated or becomes
damaged.
2. Lubricate the O-rings with a light spray of 3M silicone oil or Dow Corning #111
valve lubricant or equivalent. When applying the lubricant oil use only a thin coating.
E.6 SPECIFICATION
Overall Size:
209mm x 92mm
Weight (inc battery):
0.8kg
Power Supply:
PP3 9v, 550mA hours
Power Consumption:
42mA @ 9V
Tone Frequency:
25Hz (default) to 21Hz
Waterproof:
IP65
Battery Consumption - Constant Operation: 13 hrs
Standby:
DPN 402197
3 years
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 9 of 10
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 10 of 10
F – Reference
F REFERENCE
This appendix contains reference information that may be useful to operators of the
350 System:
Configuration log
sheet:
To be used during System installation and configuration.
The information recorded on the log sheet allows the post-processing engineers to perform a
more accurate assessment of the survey data from the 350 System. A copy of the sheet must
therefore be retained with the Survey Log.
Make copies of the master log sheet if more are required.
Complete this log both before and after every survey, and file it with the survey records.
Run Display Screen:
Refer to section 6.2.1.2 for a full description of the Run Display screen. Refer to the fold-out
drawing of a Run Display screen included in this appendix.
Forward Search
Screen:
Refer to section 6.2.1.3 for a full description of the Forward Search screen. Refer to the fold-out
drawing of a Forward Search screen included in this appendix.
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 1 of 4
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 2 of 4
F – Reference
F.1 SURVEY DETAILS
Survey vessel [] Date []
Survey vehicle []
Site []
Client []
Project number []
F.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DETAILS
SDC S/N [] Software version []
SEP S/N [] Firmware version []
Coil details:SL – S/N [] Calibration constant []
SV – S/N [] Calibration constant []
PL – S/N [] Calibration constant []
PV – S/N [] Calibration constant []
SF – S/N [] Calibration constant []
PF – S/N [] Calibration constant []
Coil separation distance []cm
Altimeter source [] Altimeter S/N []Enabled? [Y] [N]
Altimeter Offset []cmFixed coil altitude []cm
External logging rate [4] [1] per second
Target type []
Magnitude of tone current at source []mATone frequency []Hz
Reminder interval []minsThreshold setting []µV
Audible alarm enabled? [Y] [N]
Survey completed by []
TSS 350 Training Certificate Number [] Date of training []
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 3 of 4
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page 4 of 4
Index
A
ALT 1-6
Altimeter 2-13
Configuration 6-20
Connection See SEP Altimeter port
Connection to SDC 4-9
Connection to SEP 4-9
Data format 7-15
Depth rating 2-3
Dualtrack See Dualtrack
Installation 3-11
Altimeter test 6-22
Altitude of ROV See ALT
Analogue output 6-26
B
Burial Depth see COV
C
Care of connectors 4-4
Cathodic protection 7-27
Coils 2-11
Calibration constant 3-6, 6-20
Circuit description 9-3
Connection 4-7
Directional response A-5
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
Installation 3-5
Orientation 3-6
Reference line 3-5
Separation distance 3-11, 6-19
Serial number 3-6
Triad assembly 3-6
COMMS LED 5-3
Communication method
SDC 4-16
SEP 4-14
Communications
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
Connection
Care of connectors 4-4
Coils 4-7
Ground 4-3
SDC see SDC
Sub-sea power 4-5
Connector care 4-4
Corrosion prevention 4-3
COV 1-6
Curved target course 7-28
DPN 402197
D
Data Fields
Signal voltage 7-9
Data fields 7-8
Signal voltages 7-14
Target coordinates 7-9, 7-12
Data logging 6-22
Connection 4-16
External logging format 7-8
Forward search mode 7-10
Internal logging format 7-12
Replay 6-29
Survey mode 7-8
Depth of target cover see COV
Depth rating
Recognition 2-3
Display Software
Frequency Spectrum see Spectrum
Display
Oscilloscope
See Oscilloscope
Run Mode 6-8
Run Mode see Display software
Display software
Coil calibration 6-20
Coil separation distance 6-19
Configuration file 6-3
Default configuration 6-23
Forward search mode
Starting from DOS 5-4
System configuration 5-8, 6-8
Terminal window 6-16
Threshold 6-2, 6-18
Tone frequency 6-18
Display sofware
System errors 6-15
Dualtrack B-2
440 communication method B-9
Altimeter installation B-8
Coils installation B-6
Communication method B-9
Display software B-3
SDC B-5
SEP connection B-7
SEP interconnection B-9
Supply voltage B-8, B-10
Upgrade of an existing System B-9
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page i
350 Cable Survey System
E
Earth return path 7-28
Error sources 7-21
Vehicle pitch 7-24
Vehicle position 7-21
Vehicle roll 7-23
Errors
Interference 7-26
External logging format see Data logging
F
Forward range to target see FWD
Forward search mode 3-12, 7-5, A-7
Altimeter within 6-12
Data fields 7-10
Frequency spectrum display A-3
FWD 6-13
I
Installation
Altimeter see Altimeter
Coils 3-5
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
SEP see SEP
Interference 7-26
Internal logging format see Data logging
L
LAT 3-5, 6-10
Lateral offset see LAT
LED 5-3
N
Noise 7-21
Cathodic protection 7-27
Curved target course 7-28
Earth return path 7-28
Ferrous rock deposits 7-27
Power cable surveys 7-27
Vehicle noise 7-26
Vibration 7-26
O
Operating theory A-1
Oscilloscope 6-14
P
Power
Dualtrack see Dualtrack
DPN 402197
SEP 9-7
Q
Quality Control 6-10
Quality control 6-31
Envelope 6-31
envelope 8-5
flags 7-8
R
ROV altitude see Altimeter
Run display screen A-5
Skew A-8
Run mode
Coil drive 6-11
S
Saturation 7-11
SDC 2-5
COM 2 altimeter port 4-9
Communication method 4-16
Communication ports 5-6
Initialisation 5-4
Power connection 4-11
Servicing 9-9
Video ports 4-17
Virus protection 2-8
Search angle A-7
Sensor port 4-5, 4-10
SEP 1-5, 2-9, 4-4
Altimeter port 4-9
Blanking plugs 4-5, 4-8, 4-10
COM 3 data logging port 4-16
Communication method 4-14
Depth rating 2-3
Disassembly and reassembly 9-9
Grounding 4-3
Installation 3-3, 4-11
Mounting block 3-3
Power connection 4-5
Power requirements 9-7
Sensor port 4-5, 4-10
Servicing
SDC 9-9
Skew 6-10, 6-13, A-8
Spectrum Display 6-14
Status bar 6-11
Subsea Electronics Pod See SEP
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page ii
Index
T
Target coordinates 1-6
Theory of operation A-1
Threshold 6-2
Tone
configuring 6-18
V
Vehicle 7-29
Altitude 7-29
Speed of operation 7-29
Tracked vehicle 7-29
Video 4-17
Video Overlay
Setup 6-23
Video overlay
Connection 4-17
Viruses 2-8
VRT 3-5
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page iii
350 Cable Survey System
DPN 402197
© TSS (International) Ltd
Page iv